units

faculty-pg-bus

Faculty of Business and Economics

Monash University

Monash University Handbook 2015 Postgraduate - Units

This unit entry is for students who completed this unit in 2015 only. For students planning to study the unit, please refer to the unit indexes in the the current edition of the Handbook. If you have any queries contact the managing faculty for your course or area of study.

print version


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Students conduct and report on a research project that addresses an important issue in business. The research is likely to have practical as well as theoretical outcomes and implications. The research project is completed under the supervision of academic staff from the Department of Accounting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study within a set time frame
  2. demonstrate the ability to ask and answer critical questions that have accounting and policy significance at a professional standard
  3. critically analyse the literature relevant to the field of study
  4. devise and undertake empirical analysis using a range of techniques appropriate to the area of study
  5. communicate research findings in a formal report following the relevant stylistic conventions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0503 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

A study of current and emerging issues in management accounting, focusing on the relationship between Management Control Systems and strategy and the increasingly important role of the management accountant in the formulation and implementation of corporate strategy. Topics include how management accounting supports decision making, the role of Management Control Systems in managing innovation and strategic change, the impact of environmental and sustainability issues, and the increasing importance of strategic data analysis. Customer, competitor, process, organisational and behavioural perspectives are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and discuss contemporary issues in management accounting
  2. demonstrate an understanding of fundamental issues in business strategy and an appreciation of the importance of effective strategy development, implementation and management to long term value creation and sustainable business success
  3. discuss the challenges and opportunities faced by management accountants in today's global business environment and the need to make management accounting more strategically relevant to various elements of overall business activity
  4. identify and discuss how current and emerging management accounting techniques contribute to the design and implementation of strategic, marketing, production, quality and other management models in contemporary organisational settings.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination: 65%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF5080, ACC4014, ACF5080, AFF4014


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

In today's business environment the accountant engages with the organisation's senior managers and contributes to strategy formulation and implementation. This unit focuses on the concepts and techniques of business strategy formulation and how management accounting information systems act as a corporate control system providing information for strategic decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate how management accounting systems can be designed to support strategy
  2. critically evaluate strategic management accounting concepts and techniques
  3. apply management accounting techniques to strategic business decisions
  4. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement systems and strategic management accounting systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced strategic management accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5100.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Joanne Lye (First semester)
Professor David Smith (Second semester)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course 0503 there are no prerequisites. If students are enrolled in course 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402 prerequisite is ACF5955 or AFX5950.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses before undertaking this unit: 0503, 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402.

Prohibitions

AFF5100, ACC5100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit covers theoretical and practical issues relevant to forensic accounting and fraud examination. Forensic accounting is the application of investigative and analytical skills to resolve financial issues in a manner that meets standards required by courts of law. Fraud examination is the process used to resolve allegations of fraud through the accumulation of evidence, including the investigation of systems and internal controls, and the detection of fraud circumstances. The unit examines the investigative process as well as an array of tools and techniques used to investigate financial forensic issues and fraud. Topics include: methods and techniques used by forensic accountants to collect, analyse and report relevant information for supporting cases to be presented in court; the nature, prevention, detection and investigation of different types of fraud, including: financial statement fraud, fraud against the organisation, consumer fraud, and e-commerce fraud.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the nature of fraud and critically evaluate and apply theories and techniques to prevent, detect and investigate different types of fraud, including financial statement fraud, fraud against organisations, consumer fraud, and fraud in e-commerce
  2. demonstrate the application of knowledge and skills that forensic accountants and fraud examiners are expected to possess. These include: investigative techniques, knowledge of auditing, ethics, criminology, accounting, law, and information technology, and communication skills
  3. develop an ability to work independently and to lead and participate in teams from diverse cultural and social backgrounds by completing both independent and group assessable tasks
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with forensic accounting and fraud examination and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michael De Martinis (First semester)
Professor Vic Naiker (Second semester)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students have passed ACX9500, ACX5950, GSB9004 or equivalent before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses or seek the approval from the chief examiner before undertaking this unit: 0503, 3850, 3844, 4401, 0790, 0826 or 3843.

Prohibitions

AFF5120, AFX5120, ACF5120, AFF5130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is on the process of business valuation. Topics include capital markets issues, evaluation of industry profitability, accounting analysis including evaluation of earnings management techniques, preparation of pro-forma statements, forecasting, bankruptcy analysis, and business valuation techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast approaches to business valuation
  2. apply economic, industry and business analysis in the valuation process
  3. evaluate an entity's accounting information and perform fundamental and financial analysis using a contemporary approach
  4. apply prospective analysis including forecasting and valuation to a merger and acquisition case
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce a professional quality business document to solve a valuation problem; and/or deliver a professional quality presentation; and/or develop oral communication skills and demonstrate independent thinking through contributions to class discussions; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of an comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ACC5130, AFF5090, AFF5130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

The extent to which accounting theories provide a basis for determining the content of external financial reports and resolving accounting controversies. The subject will provide students with the opportunity to further develop skills of analysis, evaluation and synthesis in the areas of financial accounting and reporting and in the process create an awareness of some current developments in accounting regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire advanced knowledge and skills in understanding research articles
  2. synthesise academic literature related to financial reporting issues like voluntary disclosure and earnings management
  3. appraise and apply a methodology relating to capital markets research in accounting
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce a professional quality business document that reports on the findings of an empirical research project; and/or deliver a professional quality presentation; and/or develop oral communication skills and demonstrate independent thinking through contributions to class discussions; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of an comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ACC5150, AFF5150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 6 2015 (Online)

Synopsis

This unit introduces basic accounting principles for non-accountants. The information requirements of two main groups are examined - external users such as owners or investors; and internal users such as managers. The structure, meaning, analysis and interpretation of financial statements are explored, together with key measures of assessing financial performance. Financial issues confronting healthcare managers, such as budgeting, cost management and performance measurement are also introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key accounting principles, terms and language
  2. apply financial accounting principles in the preparation of key financial statements incorporating the balance sheet, the income statement and the statement of cash flows
  3. analyse and interpret the information contained in basic financial statements and be able to draw conclusions about financial performance, financial position, liquidity and risk of firms in the healthcare sector
  4. demonstrate skills in building, analysing and using a budget and
  5. apply the principles of management control systems to financial issues in healthcare.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ly-fie Sugianto

Synopsis

Business analytics and their applications to financial and management decision making will be explored for a range of business situations including: investment; planning; cash flow management; capital budgeting; contract awards; and risk analysis. Analytics covered include: problem structuring; multiple criteria decision making; optimisation; simulation; and data mining. Upon completion of this unit, students are expected to competently use selected analytics, to provide management interpretation of the solutions and to formulate business analyst's recommendations. The unit utilises advanced computer modelling tools available in Microsoft Excel and other modelling software packages.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appraise the role of business analytics in organisations, the decision making life cycle in business and financial management, model building techniques, model solving techniques, interpretation of results from business models and cutting edge business analytics tools
  2. propose modelling and simulation as effective business and financial decision making procedure, evaluate the risks and benefits of interactive computer-supported business decision making
  3. formulate business problem, choose theoretical framework and decide appropriate decision modelling techniques for given business management situations, assess the limitations of models and the appropriateness of modelling environments
  4. integrate critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills in the assessment of individual summative tasks and/or group tasks dealing with business analytics topics covered in ACF5320.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ETC2480, ETF2480, ETW2480, AFX5320


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Denis Fehrenbacher

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to introduce students to the business aspects of integrated enterprise systems. Enterprise systems are configurable business information systems that integrate information across multiple enterprise functions and business units, support key enterprise processes, and provide an enterprise wide view of business performance. Topics include systems and technology background, business processes and process reengineering, integration of core financial and logistics processes, enterprise wide reporting, and techniques for assessing enterprise productivity and enterprise dynamics. A well-known integrated enterprise system will be extensively used in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the characteristics of enterprise systems and evaluate their contribution to the global marketplace
  2. discuss and assess the design and operation of business processes in an integrated system as they support decision making
  3. critically analyse the factors that have contributed to world-wide adoption of enterprise systems and the types of benefits obtained
  4. demonstrate practical skills by using a popular enterprise system and employing it to solve problems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with integrated systems for business enterprises and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5330.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BUS5700, FIT5101, AFX5330


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This capstone unit requires students to synthesize, analyse, evaluate and apply prior knowledge and skills gained throughout the Master of Accounting in a manner that is designed to enhance their ability to transition to a chosen career path. The unit adopts a thematic approach that examines how external and regulatory factors, decision making processes, and stakeholder expectations interact to drive contemporary organisational success. Collectively, these three interrelated pillars of knowledge provide a comprehensive framework for those aspiring for challenging accounting and finance positions. Content is delivered in a weekly seminar format and draws upon selected case studies that cover topics including strategy, corporate governance, financial reporting and performance management. Given the integrative nature of the unit, assessment is primarily based on a combination of individual and group case study analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, synthesize and evaluate the effect of accounting policies, regulatory requirements and other external factors on organisational performance
  2. analyse, synthesize and evaluate drivers of sustainable competitive advantage and value creation in various organisational and industry settings, including their impact on stakeholder satisfaction
  3. analyse, synthesize and evaluate contemporary performance management systems (PMS) and the role played by PMS in strategy formulation and decision making
  4. demonstrate written and presentation skills at a level required for a senior career in accounting and business
  5. demonstrate research and analytical skills to solve complex accounting and business problems and ethical dilemmas
  6. demonstrate a capacity to work independently and lead and participate in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Aldonio Ferreira (First semester)
Dr Stephen Smith (Second semester)

Prerequisites

ACF5100 or AFF5100 and ACF5120 or AFF5120 and ACF5130 or AFF5130 and ACF5150 or AFF5150

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0503 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit builds on the knowledge base acquired from earlier accounting units and is intended to provide students with an integrated understanding of the learning and experiences acquired in the course. Forming the capstone for the Master of Professional Accounting degree, students will consider managerial, public policy, ethical and sustainability implications of business decisions. Through a detailed case study, the unit draws together technical, analytical, problem solving and communication skills that assist in deriving solutions that not only consider internal and external forces, but are also in accordance with relevant accounting standards, laws and guidelines. As such, the unit also prepares students for a successful transition to the accounting profession.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and practical aspects of accounting, translate this knowledge into a practical problem-solving framework, and apply this to solve practical accounting problems
  2. demonstrate critical analysis and research skills by employing them to produce professional quality documents that address professional accounting issues
  3. demonstrate the capacity to work effectively in a team in a group project
  4. demonstrate effective oral and written communication skills in summative assessment tasks
  5. demonstrate the ability to solve problems involving public policy, ethical and sustainability issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 80%
Examination: 20%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ACF5955, ACF5956, ACF5957 & ACF5958.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Greg van Mourik

Synopsis

This unit examines accounting as an information system. It will introduce students to accounting principles and reporting practices from a users perspective. The information requirements of two main groups are examined - external users such as owners, shareholders, investors, potential investors, and internal users such as managers. This unit provides students with an introduction to accounting and an understanding of the preparation, presentation and interpretation of financial statements. In particular, emphasis is placed on an understanding of various business structures including control and reporting aspects of new businesses, processes, practices and policies that enable the financial performance and financial position of an entity, as displayed by the balance sheet, income statement and statement of cash flows, to be measured, analysed and interpreted. Managerial accounting issues are also presented, with particular emphasis on cost management, cost behaviour, budgeting and performance measurement.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand various forms of business organisations
  2. apply financial and management accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements
  3. measure performance, financial position, liquidity and risk indicators of particular businesses
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to solve accounting problems; demonstrate independent thinking through contribution to class discussions; and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 45%
Examination: 55%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFX9003, GSB9004, MBA9004 AND students enrolled in any of the following courses are prohibited: 0790, 0826, 3843, 4402, 0503, 3850, 4401.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Red Ceglowski

Synopsis

Because most accounting systems are computerised, accountants must understand software and information systems to turn data into financial information and to develop and evaluate controls. This unit builds an understanding of the way accounting information systems work so that students may use, analyse and contribute to the design of accounting information systems and subsystems. Accordingly, the unit provides students with an understanding of critical information technologies that drive information systems; core business processes that allow an organisation to operate efficiently and effectively; common documentation tools used to diagram and assess business processes and databases; and internal control concepts that can be applied to mitigate risks.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the use of information systems for business and analyse and make recommendations on the utilisation and design of such systems
  2. interpret business process documentation including flowcharts and data flow diagrams
  3. communicate with database professionals about the design of databases
  4. critique computerised and manual business processes in terms of their exposure to risk, and suggest internal controls that address the risks
  5. apply critical thinking and problem solving to activities dealing with accounting information systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Either ACF5950 or AFX9500

Prohibitions

AFF2851, AFC2851, AFX9520, AFX9521, AFX9580 and ACF5958


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to accounting and an understanding of the preparation, presentation and interpretation of financial statements. In particular, emphasis is placed on accounting processes, practices and policies that enable the financial performance and financial position of an entity, as displayed by the balance sheet, income statement and statement of cash flows, to be measured, analysed and interpreted.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and record accounting transactions and events, and produce financial statements consistent with the accounting conceptual framework and accounting standards
  2. appraise the relative merits of accrual and cash accounting
  3. prepare special journals as they relate to cash and the periodic and perpetual inventory recording systems
  4. critically evaluate an entity's financial position and performance
  5. demonstrate effective individual technical skills to construct accounting records and financial statements for a unique business; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses before undertaking this unit: 1822, 0748, 0790, 0826, 4402 or 3843.

Prohibitions

AFF9500, AFG9071, ACG5971, AFX9500


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

An overview of the Australian financial reporting and regulatory framework for reporting entities, including an analysis of the relevant significant accounting standards, benchmarking against the conceptual framework, professional reporting requirements and stock exchange requirements. Financial reporting for corporate groups (including the impact of control, joint control and significant influence) and selected issues in financial reporting are also explored and benchmarked against the conceptual framework.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and compare the regulatory requirements, domestic and international, associated with the preparation of general purpose financial statement for companies
  2. apply and critique the accounting rules for entities' investments in other entities, and apply these rules to prepare consolidated financial statements
  3. analyse a number of measurement and financial reporting issues and their possible resolution, including: accounting for income tax, post-acquisition accounting for assets, and business combinations
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group to produce professional quality research reports; effective individual technical skills to construct consolidated financial statements; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wei Lu (First semester)
Dr Karen Lai (Second semester)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course 0503 there are no prerequisites. If students are enrolled in course 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402 the prerequisite is AFX9500 or ACF5950.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0503,1822, 0748, 0790, 0826, 4402 or 3843 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF9601, afg9073, AFX4601, AFX9530


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of the concepts and techniques of management accounting, and skills in the use of management accounting techniques to communicate decision-useful information to management. The unit content includes costing terminology, cost accumulation and recording systems, costing methods for both manufacturing and service-based organisations, how management accounting information informs key product decisions such as pricing and product mix, and the design of budget systems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management accounting principles and techniques to service and manufacturing industry cases
  2. compare, contrast and demonstrate various costing models
  3. design budgets and explain the behavioural aspects of different budgeting styles
  4. examine cost-volume-profit analyses, divisional performance evaluation measures
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to solve management accounting problems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5955.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFX9500 or ACX5950

Prohibitions

AFF9611, AFG9072, ACG5972, AFX5611, AFX9550


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit is one of the final core units in the Master of Professional Accounting, and builds on knowledge and skills gained in earlier units in financial accounting. One of its primary purposes is to introduce students to theories currently being used to assist in understanding the role of financial accounting and reporting in the decision making process of both preparers and users of information. These theories include positive accounting theory, capital markets and systems theories. It also addresses how regulation might influence the production of accounting information.

The unit addresses a number of contemporary accounting topics, from both a practical and theoretical perspective. These include intangible assets, social and environmental reporting, financial instruments and foreign currency transactions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply a range of theories of accounting to explain financial accounting and reporting practices and appreciate the judgments, estimations and assumptions influencing accounting numbers
  2. critically assess and appreciate changing influences in standard setting; the compliance regime in capital markets and impacts of regulatory requirements on financial reporting practices
  3. assess the role of financial accounting in sustainable development and corporate social and environmental performance reporting
  4. analyse a range of financial reporting issues, including intangible assets, financial instruments and foreign currency transactions, from both a practical and theoretical perspective; and demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to solve financial accounting problems; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Michaela Rankin (First semester)
Dr Dean Hanlon (Second semester)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course 0503 there are no prerequisites. If students are enrolled in course 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402 prerequisite is ACF5953 or AFX9530.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses before undertaking this unit: 0503, 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402.

Prohibitions

AFF9631, AFG9040, ACG5940, AFX5631, AFX9560


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr SriramNagarajan (Ram)

Synopsis

Topics include nature and objectives of auditing; auditing standards; audit reporting; audit expectation gap and legal liability; professional ethics and quality control; audit evidence; audit planning, strategic business risk analysis, materiality, analytical review procedures and audit risk model; study and evaluation of internal control and model; assessing control risk CIS audit techniques, test of transactions and tests of balances, completing the audit and post audit responsibilities; internal auditing and performance auditing, other assurance services and current issues in auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and debate the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society, and give examples of the professional, ethical and legal obligations, and the standards and principles applicable to the audit profession
  2. distinguish between the different types and levels of assurance services provided by professional practitioners, including auditors, and describe the assurance framework
  3. examine the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on assessment of internal controls and the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  4. identify, distinguish between and apply the key evidence gathering procedures used by auditors when planning, testing, completing the audit and forming an audit opinion
  5. demonstrate an ability to work independently and to lead and participate in teams from diverse cultural and social backgrounds in independent and group assessable tasks
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5957.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course 0503 there are no prerequisites. If students are enrolled in course 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402 prerequisite is ACF5953 or AFX5930.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses before undertaking this unit: 0503, 0748, 0790, 0826, 3843 or 4402.

Prohibitions

AFG9041, ACG5941, AFF9621, AFX5621, AFX9570


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. Initially the unit focuses on effective design and auditing of spreadsheet models, types and uses of models, and the benefits and limitations of models for use as decision support tools; various models are developed using an industry standard spreadsheet. Methods such as exploring data variations within financial models, optimisation models, probabilistic and forecasting models are covered; and emphasis placed on hypothesis testing, descriptive statistics, frequency and probability distributions, and simple linear regression and correlation. Having provided practical information analysis tools, the unit proceeds to the theoretical analysis of accounting information and the role technology plays in gathering, storing and managing accounting information. The unit provides an introduction to accounting information systems; business processes; enterprise systems; and internal controls.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a working facility with spreadsheet software by formulating well formed computer-based financial models suitable for use by management and decision makers
  2. analyse data produced by models via statistical and quantitative analysis to arrive at rational optimal decision outcomes in business planning, forecasting and management
  3. examine the role of integrated accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to financial activities of a company
  4. analyse the issues involved in the use of computerised accounting information systems and financial models
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with accounting information and systems modelling and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5958.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

ACF5950. There are no co-requisites for students enrolled in Master of Accounting or Master of Business (Accounting).

Prohibitions

AFF2851, AFC2851, AFX9520, AFX9521 and GCO8019


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Abdel Halabi

Synopsis

The accounting process required to prepare financial reports and the elements of these reports including assets, liabilities, equity, revenue and expenses. Students learn to classify economic transactions into appropriate accounts and calculate ratios for analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and discuss the role of accounting in business and its theoretical framework
  2. develop skills in the analysis of accounting transactions and events, recording entries in both manual and computer based ledger systems, and in the production of balance sheets statements of changes in owners equity, income statements and cash flows
  3. apply an analytical approach to problem-solving both in the preparation of financial statements and in their use to assist in decision-making
  4. analyse financial statements for profitability and risk
  5. demonstrate competence in business communications through oral and written assessments.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFX9500, ACF5950, ACX5950, AFF9500, AFG9071


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mrs Robyn Dyt

Synopsis

Issues include the influences on the nature and objectives of corporate financial accounting, profit determination and distribution, the reorganisation of share capital, the balance sheet and income and cash flow statements, tax effect accounting, accounting for the acquisition, revaluation and impairment of assets, accounting for consolidations, including inter-company transactions and outside equity interests.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a thorough knowledge of the content of the reports of publicly listed companies and be able to prepare such reports and regulations of the various regulatory bodies
  2. develop an understanding of the nature of the inter corporate reporting, its principles and concepts in respect of public companies and one or more fully and/or partly owned subsidiary companies
  3. demonstrate competence in business communications through written assessment in this unit
  4. develop an ability to work independently and to participate in group discussions with participants from diverse backgrounds
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACG5973.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFG9071 or ACG5971

Prohibitions

AFX4601, AFX9530, ACX5953, AFG9073, AFF9601


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Introduction to a broad range of research methodology and testing procedures used in accounting. The primary focus is on the undertaking of research. This unit comprises an analysis of the science of research, an examination of the key elements of research in accounting, data issues, ethical issues, hypothesis development, causal models, the use of parametric and non-parametric statistical tests, survey-based research and general research methodology. The unit also entails preparation of a research proposal in an area of accounting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the major steps in the development of a research project in accounting
  2. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses in accounting research designs and methods
  3. apply qualitative and quantitative data analysis techniques and interpret the output
  4. prepare a research proposal in accounting incorporating a literature review related to a selected topic in accounting, testable hypotheses, appropriate design to test the hypotheses and data requirements
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171, 4416 or 0503 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4000


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFX4000 or ACX4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4018


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to provide students with a broad introduction to the contemporary themes in research into Accounting Information Systems. The unit covers issues of research and practice in the following areas: frameworks and ontologies in information systems; decision making; process modelling; behavioural aspects concerned with the design and implementation of systems; and data management issues. Upon completion of this unit, students are expected to be able to evaluate critically the design and conduct of research, and to design their own research into issues of relevance to the accounting information systems field.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of key philosophical issues in Accounting Information Systems research, particularly the ontological foundations of the discipline
  2. articulate solutions to significant research problems using key paradigms in the Accounting Information Systems discipline
  3. critique research relating to the design and use of accounting and business information systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4040


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various participants to the audit process. The unit provides students with an overview of the nature of assurance and regulation of the audit profession, the economics of auditing, and the behavioural dimensions of auditing. Topics also include future directions for assurance services, fraud, internal control and corporate governance issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and contrast research paradigms in auditing and assurance research
  2. describe and evaluate the range of methods of decision making in auditing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in auditing and assurance including audit quality, internal control, fraud and corporate governance
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in auditing and assurance and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dean Hanlon

Synopsis

This unit examines a wide range of contemporary issues in financial accounting research, including development of financial accounting theory, contracting theory and accounting policy choice (e.g., debt contracts and management compensation), corporate governance, earnings quality, information content of earnings and its components, post-earnings announcement drift and other accounting anomalies, and market reaction to accounting regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate research paradigms in financial accounting
  2. critically evaluate the literature on financial reporting and capital market
  3. critically evaluate the literature on pricing of information
  4. critically evaluate the statistical models employed in the financial reporting and capital market literature
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in financial reporting and capital market and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4070.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4070


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

The major theoretical foundations of the management accounting discipline including the economics (agency), psychology (behavioural, etc.) and organisational (contingency) approaches are introduced. The unit shows how these disciplines have influenced the view of managers. Management accounting is presented as a professional discipline primarily concerned with influencing and facilitating decisions, and several accounting technologies are critically assessed. This unit focuses on technologies which are useful in the short and medium term including budgeting and incentive plans as well as those that take a long-term or strategic viewpoint.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss research paradigms and core concepts related to organisational, economic, behavioural and sociological theories as they relate to management accounting research
  2. critically evaluate recent developments in strategic thinking and implications for management accounting
  3. critically evaluate empirical research to identify recent developments in management accounting practices from perspectives of both content and processes
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in management accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4090.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0171 or 0181 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4090


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit examines the association between financial reporting information and capital markets. Specific areas of focus include accounting-based valuation models, discussions of pricing of information risk in the context of the capital asset pricing models, expected cost of equity capital, implied cost of equity capital, cost of debt, and application of cost of capital to auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe accounting-based valuation methods and apply these methods to listed companies
  2. critically evaluate the role of information risk in securities pricing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research in cost of equity capital
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with the analysis of financial statements.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various subdisciplines of accounting. The unit provides students with an overview of behavioural research in each of the following areas: management accounting and accounting information systems, financial accounting and auditing. Students are also provided with an appreciation of some of the issues involved in the most commonly applied research methods in behavioural accounting research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in behavioural research in accounting
  2. critically evaluate recent developments in behavioural research and implications for accounting researchers/practitioners
  3. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses in commonly applied research methods in behavioural research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in behavioural accounting and demonstrate in individual assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4190.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours), Postgraduate Diploma in Economics and Commerce or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFX4190


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Accounting
Monash Passport categoryInternational Short Field Experience (Explore Program)
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wei Lu

Synopsis

This unit centres on both a conceptual and practical approach to International Accounting Issues with emphasis on international standard setting and compliance as viewed by regulators and private sector preparers of accounts. Students gain a practical understanding of these issues in an international context through the overseas visitation program which forms an integral part of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding the history of accounting standard setting in various countries and the international convergence of accounting standards
  2. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international accounting through an overseas visitation program
  3. develop a set of academic skills which include the ability to work independently, evaluate academic papers in terms of the application of theories to understand and explain differences in financial reporting, search the web and to submit assignments on time
  4. develop excellent oral and written communication skills to be able to analyse case studies and to lead/participate in groups from diverse cultural and social backgrounds.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the unit coordinator before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF9551


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Winter semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Winter semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Overseas Winter semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.

Prohibitions

BEH9001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Overseas Winter semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.

Prohibitions

BEH9002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Winter semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.

Prohibitions

BEH9003


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Winter semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.

Prohibitions

BEH9004


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of qualitative research, with specific focus on qualitative research philosophy, qualitative research design and qualitative research methods. This unit explores topics such as: paradigmatic approaches to research; research design; negotiation of access to research sites/participants; researcher ethics; methods of qualitative data collection such as observation, interviews, focus groups and non-intrusive data collection; methods of data analysis; issues of qualitative research validity; and qualitative writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3169, 3845 or 4414 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to quantitative research methods. This subject is one of two that together supply the research methodology skills and knowledge necessary for students to complete an independent research project at the honours level. It provides a comprehensive coverage of quantitative research methodologies. Topics include: survey studies/correlational field studies; forms of regression; analysis of variances; discriminant analysis; factor analysis; non-parametric statistics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3169, 3845 or 4414 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ETW2111, ETX2111, ETX2121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Uma Devi Jogulu

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Assessment

Assessment will be through a combination of assignments, examinations, and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3169, 3845 or 4414 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Uma Devi Jogulu

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Assessment

Assignments, examinations and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3169, 3845 or 4414 to undertake this unit.


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Full year 2015 (Day)
South Africa Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Uma Devi Jogulu

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to plan, carry out, and report on an original research project that addresses a significant issues in business; this research project is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications; as well, it is hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate journal.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3169, 3845 or 4414 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit considers the quantitative research methods used in studying business, management and organisational analysis. Topics to be covered include: research design including experimental designs studies; data collection including designing data collection instruments, sampling strategies and assessing the appropriateness of archival data for a research purpose; data analysis including graphical and numerical techniques for the exploration of large data sets; communication of quantitative research; and the use of statistical software packages such as SPSS in research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire the necessary quantitative skills to conduct high quality independent research related to business administration
  2. acquire a comprehensive grounding in a number of quantitative methods of data production and analysis
  3. consider and evaluate data collection instruments, sampling strategies and the appropriateness of archival data for a research purpose
  4. assess research design including experimental designs, observational studies, case studies, longitudinal analysis and cross-sectional analysis
  5. conduct quantitative data analysis of a suitable multivariate data set through a practical research activity.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

BEX5010 and students must be enrolled in course 4408 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Winter semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Walker

Synopsis

This unit comprises of a community or industry based project. Students will gain skills relevant to their area of business and an increased insight into the business professions.

Outcomes

The learning objective of this unit is to enable the students to undertake, and reflect upon, an industry or organisational learning activity of relevance to their studies.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Course Director before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an understanding of the issues underlying the conducting of rigorous and theoretically correct and practically relevant qualitative business related research. Students will be introduced to ways of using different research methods within qualitative research, such as case study research, interviewing, naturalistic observation and text analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire the necessary skills to conduct high quality independent qualitative research related to business administration
  2. acquire a comprehensive grounding in a number of qualitative research methods applicable in different business environments
  3. understand how to collect qualitative data using a variety of research techniques
  4. design probability and non-probability samples for conducting qualitative research
  5. analyse and evaluate qualitative data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

BEX5000 and Students must be enrolled in course code 4408 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Winter semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Walker

Notes

Students must have completed at least 1 semester of full time equivalent study at Monash before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a deeper understanding of the difference between theory and practice
  2. apply theory and ethical values to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. apply research skills and provide innovative solutions to complex business problems
  5. communicate effectively and perceptively in a business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Unit coordinator permission required.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in a Master's program to undertake this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

Students will prepare a research proposal in a discipline area approved by the course coordinator. Students will, with the assistance of a research mentor, select a research topic and prepare a proposal for their MPhil thesis consisting of a literature review, theory and hypothesis development, an outline of the research methods to be applied and the data requirements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of the planning phases of a research project including topic selection
  2. prepare a literature review relating to the topic that demonstrates a breadth of reading and an analysis of the academic papers in terms of both progressive development of theories and, where existing, conflict of views
  3. develop research questions and/or hypotheses for the study, which flow from the literature review
  4. identify and discuss the methodology to be employed for the testing of the research questions and/or hypotheses including the data requirements, types of data collection
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Students must have achieved an average mark of 70 (D) in BEX5000 and BEX5010 before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4408 Master of Philosophy .


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Farshid Vahid

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Param Silvapulle

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Harmen Oppewal

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jeffrey LaFrance

Synopsis

Neoclassical theories of demand, supply, and equilibrium at a level that permits rigorous analysis. Introduction to game theory. Topics include the existence theorem of utility functions, properties of demand and supply functions, existence and Pareto optimality of competitive equilibrium, and various equilibrium concepts of non-cooperative games.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. deepen understanding of microeconomic analysis acquired during undergraduate training
  2. undertake rigorous analysis of microeconomic issues, including the determinants of relative prices and their effects on resource allocation
  3. learn some more advanced analyses going beyond the traditional model and taking account of some real-world complications
  4. acquire proficiency in handling optimisation problems and have a basic understanding of general equilibrium analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Bruce Preston

Synopsis

Underpinnings of modern macroeconomics basic to models of growth and cyclical fluctuations as well as models of monetary and fiscal policies. Topics include neoclassical and endogenous growth theories; overlapping generations models with and without money; policy ineffectiveness issues; equilibrium business cycle as well as traditional Keynesian models of fluctuations; and models of incomplete nominal adjustment such as those of New-Keynesian and the Lucas-Supply variety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic theoretical structures common to modern dynamic macroeconomics. In particular, critical analysis of the economic reasons underlying the formation of policy and movements of various macro-aggregates
  2. understand the key determinants affecting economic growth and fluctuations
  3. enhance understanding of the basic theoretical approaches employed in specialist fields such as international economics, economic development/growth, applied general equilibrium and financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPrato Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Synopsis

European business and society is an intensive two week unit taught in Europe. One week is taught at the Monash Prato Centre in Italy and the second week incorporates presentations/lectures in organisation visits in Europe. The unit enables students to better understand the political, economic and social environment in which business operates in Europe. Specifically the unit considers the establishment and functioning of the European Union (EU) and its relationship with its member states as well as providing students with an awareness of the key debates, issues and on-going challenges facing Europe and the European Union. These challenges and their implications for business/management policy and practice in Europe, underpin the essence of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase students awareness and understanding of Europe and the European Union
  2. examine the nature of the forces in the European environment (e.g. political, economic, legal, social and cultural) and their impact upon business
  3. research and critically analyse the challenges facing Europe and understand their implications for policy and practice in business and society
  4. gain knowledge from organisational visits in order to develop insights that can be applied as future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business and society.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload for this unit is 288 hours per semester. This comprises of a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning (including site visits) and peer directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Birendra Rai

Synopsis

Mathematical preliminaries; static optimisation theory; introduction to calculus of variations and optimal control theory; necessary and sufficient conditions; investment theory: costs of adjustment, neoclassical, Q theory; consumption theory; use of duality theory; growth models; Hamilton Jacobi theory; discrete time stochastic models; selected current applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theories of static optimisation, including the first and second order conditions for the multi-dimensional case
  2. analyse mathematically how changes in the economic environment affect economic agents' optimal decisions
  3. analyse dynamic optimisation problems faced by economic agents
  4. develop students' ability to access frontier research in economics that routinely makes use of many mathematical concepts in optimisation theories.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Johnston

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anmol Ratan

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECC2000, ETC2000


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Fancis In

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skills and proficiency to empirically conduct research in broad areas of finance. Students will apply their technical skills developed in other coursework units to test important research questions.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Chris Veld

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to introduce doctoral candidates to current research issues and empirical tools in asset pricing. This unit will cover theoretical and empirical papers in asset pricing and will benefit students interested in writing their thesis in the areas of investments and asset pricing.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit introduces doctoral candidates to current research issues and empirical tools in corporate finance and corporate governance. This unit will cover theoretical and empirical papers in corporate finance and corporate governance and will benefit students interested in writing their thesis in corporate finance or corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of contemporary issues in corporate finance and governance
  2. critically evaluate current theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance and governance
  3. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance and governance
  4. effectively convey ideas in writing and speech
  5. demonstrate comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this course.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester of formal class contact

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit introduces doctoral candidates to the current research issues and empirical tools in the area of banking. This unit will cover theoretical and empirical papers as well as introduce students to banking related databases and the main methodology required to conduct high-level banking research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of contemporary issues in financial institution research
  2. critically evaluate current theoretical and empirical research in financial institution research
  3. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind theoretical and empirical research in financial institution research
  4. effectively convey ideas in writing and speech
  5. demonstrate comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this course

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% Examination: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 4 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Term 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ralph Kober

Synopsis

The unit focuses on advanced quantitative research methods used in studying accounting, business, finance, management, marketing, and organisational analysis. Topics to be covered include analytic techniques used for experimental, quasi-experimental, and non experimental research designs. The unit focuses on topics include multivariate techniques which deal with cross-sectional, panel, and time-series data. For example, topics include various multivariate ANOVA techniques, regression procedures, discrete choice models, factor analysis, cluster analysis, structural and simultaneous equation modelling, and time-series analysis techniques. Computer sessions will provide students with the opportunity to apply their classroom learning to various business and management cases.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the necessary quantitative skills to conduct high quality independent research relevant to their discipline
  2. develop a comprehensive grounding in a number of quantitative methods of data production and analysis
  3. consider and evaluate data collection instruments, sampling strategies and the appropriateness of various types of data for research purposes
  4. assess research designs including experimental design, observational studies, case studies, longitudinal analysis and cross-sectional analysis
  5. conduct quantitative data analysis of a suitable multivariate data set through a practical research activity
  6. develop good communication skills by presenting a defence and/or critique of different methodological positions and perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester (split-block mode) of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

BEX6300 and students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or 3194 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

DBA6000


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 2 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Term 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan

Synopsis

The unit will provide HDR students with the requisite knowledge and skills in qualitative research methodology to enable them to design and execute a PhD research project. The unit will review and explain various qualitative research methods with the aim of critically evaluating the paradigmatic underpinnings of, for example, interpretivist, phenomenological and postmodern theories as they pertain to research design and the collection and analysis of data. Topics to be covered include data gathering techniques such as interviews, content analysis, fieldwork and observation and analysis procedures such as constant comparative analysis. The unit will also provide students with the opportunity to report findings through written and oral presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills to design qualitative research studies
  2. acquire skills to conduct high quality independent qualitative research
  3. consider and evaluate data collection instruments, and sampling strategies for a qualitative research purpose
  4. assess research design across a range of qualitative research strategies
  5. conduct a qualitative research project and report in an appropriate discursive style.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester (split-block mode) of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

BEX6300 and students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or 3194 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

DBA6010


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 3 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Julie Wolfram Cox

Synopsis

This unit discusses the fundamental epistemological premises on which HDR research may be developed. It explores ways of formulating research question(s) and hypotheses, and identifies assumptions and theories that are relevant in the development of a conceptual framework for research. The topics discussed will cover principles of the scientific method, key epistemological perspectives in the social sciences (e.g. positivism, interpretivism, social constructivism, hermeneutics, functionalism, critical theory) and argument analysis (e.g. avoiding fallacies in scientific reasoning, evaluating and constructing sound arguments). These discussions will clarify the theoretical and practical underpinnings of research design, inform subsequent analyses of how to select different research methods (qualitative, quantitative, mixed), and illustrate key issues associated with main argument development in a HDR thesis. Finally, the unit will examine ways of presenting a compelling theoretical and practical case for the epistemological significance of a HDR project, and examine how this approach could increase the likelihood of successful publication of research results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enhance awareness of the multiple epistemological and ontological perspectives that underpin research at HDR level
  2. increase understanding of the principles involved in producing sound complex arguments as required in writing a HDR thesis
  3. consider and evaluate research papers presented in the research seminar series
  4. evaluate the literature, philosophical traditions, methods and problems associated with several topics
  5. apply knowledge of ontological, epistemological, methodological and procedural assumptions to the preparation of papers that demonstrate an advanced understanding of the assumptions, methodology, techniques and results of research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester (split-block mode) of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

BEX6100 or BEX6200 and students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or 3194 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to probability theory and statistical inference for graduate studies in econometrics and business statistics and related fields. It is intended to prepare research students for a range of other units in econometrics and business statistics. The first part will cover basic probability theory and the second half will be concerned with aspects of statistical inference. Some prior exposure to the topics to at least the advanced undergraduate level will be assumed. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some basic quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure that students have the necessary familiarity with the essentials of probability theory and statistical inference to be able to read graduate level books and journal articles in econometrics and business statistics
  2. minimise rote learning and to encourage students to provide justification to econometric and statistical ideas and to derive results from first principals. To this end, students need to know the basic definitions, concepts and the chain of arguments on which the econometric and statistical theory is built.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in either the 3194 Master of Philosophy or the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy to enrol in this unit.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

This unit provides a rigorous treatment of core methods of econometric estimation and inference in a single and also multiple equation settings. While students are encouraged to look at every problem from several views (informal, algebraic, geometric, etc.), a large emphasis is placed on constructing formal arguments, and the importance of clear notation, definitions, assumptions and deductive arguments is emphasised. Formal lectures and references to graduate level textbooks are provided, and students are also assigned and encouraged to read some classic journal articles. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure PhD candidates master the core elements of econometrics to be able to generalise and apply these principles to research questions
  2. encourage and train PhD students to grind through complex scholarly journal articles and harvest the elements needed to conduct research
  3. train PhD students in developing a habit of using clear notation and clear arguments in research work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have successfully completed ETX6500 or BEX6500 to enrol in this unit.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Birendra Rai

Synopsis

Advanced topics in microeconomics and current research and policy issues. Topics may include an in-depth study of general equilibrium, mesoeconomics, new classical economics of specialisation, transaction costs, and inframarginal analysis, principal agent models and incentive regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in microeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%
Option 2: Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

3 hours per week

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level course work which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Siew-Ling Yew

Synopsis

Advanced topics in macroeconomics, current research and policy issues. The topics may include an in-depth study of consumption, investment, inflation and monetary policy, unemployment, and empirical applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in macroeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level coursework which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 0029 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Carolyn Sutherland

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skill and proficiency to conduct HDR research in business law. The aim of the unit is to assist students to develop research capabilities in the following areas: formulating research questions for legal problems; selecting a research purpose and theoretical perspective; approaches to the literature review; developing complex arguments; organising and structuring content in a law thesis; advanced writing techniques; ethical issues that arise in legal research; and presenting and publishing research in business law. The unit will also guide students to understand and evaluate legal research perspectives and methodologies that suit different types of research problems in business law. These will include traditional doctrinal approaches; comparative legal methods; legal realist, law in action and critical legal studies perspectives; legal history and empirical legal methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase understanding of the practical challenges that arise in business law research
  2. translate a business law problem into a research problem and research questions and devise an effective research strategy
  3. develop capabilities in producing complex and coherent arguments as required for a thesis in business law
  4. apply relevant theories and methodologies to research problems in business law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

72 hours per semester of formal class contact, plus an additional 168 hours of private study. Also see unit timetable informationunit timetable information (http://www.monash.edu.au/timetables/).

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level coursework units which need to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 0029 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Warren Gillian

Synopsis

The management of risk is a multi-dimensional activity that entails a range of disciplines and thought processes to ensure that resilience is created and maintained within the firm. There needs to be an understanding by business students of the range of activities and events that can be exposed by the application of risk management techniques and processes. This unit includes detailed analysis of a series of case studies drawn from real life events that encompass the holistic nature of risk within a firm and/or society. If appropriate, they may be presented and discussed by an industry practitioner. The unit is designed to bring all facets of the specialisation together.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop analytical and diagnostic skills and in particular enhance an ability to analyse and resolve problems of practical importance
  2. analyse situations and scenarios by reference to case studies relating to risk management and articulate a response in an effective manner
  3. gain experience in a controlled environment in skills needed for practical implementation of risk management policy within a corporate setting
  4. decide on response tactics ranging from qualitative to quantitative as appropriate
  5. categorise degrees of risk and respond to risk situations, justify responses to various set situations using the matrix approach and emphasise the relationship of risk factors and scenarios to risk practitioners and various guest speakers
  6. work in an individual and/or team environment and develop the ability to project and defend a point of view in a constructive manner
  7. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5021.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFF9020 or BFF5902

Prohibitions

AFF5021


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Hans Buettner

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop the concept of risk transfer, or the insurance purchase decision, as an outcome of risk management decision-making. It discusses the concept and application of insurance and the principals underlying the insurance purchase, with emphasis on the relationship to the risk management process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the risk transfer decision-making process and explain the concept of risk within an insurance framework
  2. outline the principles of risk allocation in non-insurance contracts
  3. explain the structure of the insurance industry and the functions of an insurance company
  4. outline the core concepts underlying the main insurance industry sectors of life, accident, health, property and liability
  5. discuss and comment on the implications of the growing convergence of the broader financial services industry
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5031.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFF9020 or BFF5902

Prohibitions

AFF5031


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit evaluates and applies contemporary approaches used to analyse and price financial assets including:

  • security and market performance measures
  • multifactor asset pricing
  • fundamental valuation
  • technical analysis
  • fixed income and hybrid securities
  • forward interest rates and swaps
  • investing and hedging with futures, options and other derivatives
  • pricing risk
  • credit derivatives

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a recognition and understanding of the investment environment and its impact on asset valuation
  2. develop analytical skills related to the valuation of various investments
  3. develop skills to critically evaluate various investment strategies
  4. develop skills relating to dealing with financial risk
  5. develop a critical perspective of such investment management
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Cameron Truong (First semester)
Dr John Vaz (Second semester)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF9350 or BFF5935, or be enrolled in course 3818, 3850 or 4412 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5040


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include history of international banking; international financial system and its major players; regulations and interaction with public policy; world debt; foreign exchange markets; lending and investment criteria; the Australian international banking sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop skills in understanding of the role of international banking within the international financial, derivatives and regulatory markets
  2. develop an international banking perspective by contrasting different banking and finance systems in other countries
  3. develop an ability to work in a team by completing a group report that requires a written synthesis of the contributions of team members and presentation of the report in the class
  4. develop oral presentation skills by participation in discussions during tutorials
  5. develop academic skills by preparing an individual assignment based on empirical studies that requires research using the web and print reference materials
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Piyadasa Edirisuriya (First semester)
Dr Silvio Contessi (Second semester)

Prohibitions

AFF5050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit aims to combine the knowledge students have achieved in their Master of Banking and Finance studies. In addition, the unit introduces a significant research component and assignment to ensure students are familiar with the scientific research method, are able to analyse research papers and understand the aim of research in contributing to theoretical concepts in finance and banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the ability to independently and critically investigate both quantitative and qualitative banking and finance problems, applying and consolidating prior learning to propose solutions
  2. evaluate and weigh information so as to make judgements and arrive at decisions about ethics in business
  3. develop applied research skills on an individual basis and apply these skills to a relevant research assignment
  4. demonstrate the ability to synthesise conclusions and communicate analysis in a concise business manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 72 credit points.


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Under supervision, students are expected to undertake and report on an original research topic that addresses a contemporary and/or a significant issue in the field of accounting, banking and finance, insurance or risk management. Students must find a suitable supervisor, have selected an appropriate area of research and have obtained the approval of their course director before undertaking in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an ability to work independently by selecting a research project that requires a critical review of the literature and derivation of appropriate hypotheses
  2. acquire knowledge of devising appropriate procedures for the testing of the hypotheses, showing regard to both theoretical and practical problems of conducting scientific research
  3. develop the ability to conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising from the research design and data collection
  4. develop a high level of analytical, written and communication skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFX4000, ACX4000 and AFX4010

Prohibitions

AFF5180


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit analyses the characteristics, uses and behaviour of financial markets. Topics include:

  • types and users of financial markets
  • financial crises
  • global risk
  • international ratings
  • international debt and equity markets
  • derivative markets
  • credit derivatives
  • specialised sources of international finance
  • regulation of international markets

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the structure of global financial markets
  2. evaluate the impact of international securities and tax law on international financial markets
  3. evaluate academic papers in terms of the application of finance theories to the international financial markets
  4. demonstrate effective interpersonal communication skills and develop a team-orientated approach to work effectively as a team member to produce a professional quality business document solving financial market-related problems
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of global financial markets, their products and appropriateness for the investor.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0504, 2619, 3189, 3818, 3850 or 4412 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5230


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr David Robinson

Synopsis

This unit covers five pillars of corporate treasury management:

  • corporate finance (financing, investment, dividend payout)
  • debt and equity markets and product design
  • liquidity/net working capital management
  • risk transfer, retention and management (exchange rate risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, and loan concentration risk)
  • managing corporate treasury as a strategic unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. design corporate treasury as a strategic business unit with clear structure, roles, functions and control systems
  2. design a risk management framework that reflects the risk appetite of the firm
  3. design risk management strategies including hedging techniques for commodity, interest rate and foreign exchange risk management
  4. design sensitivity analysis, scenario analysis, stress testing approaches and apply real option analysis to assist corporate treasurers to analyse investment projects
  5. design structured and option embedded debt and equity products with emphasis on pricing and market considerations
  6. appraise empirical approaches to net working capital management and liquidity management and the treasurer's role in managing profit-risk trade-off
  7. debate empirical estimation of 'optimal' capital structure and the treasurer's role in optimising debt-equity mix using both short and long term funding
  8. debate Australia's dividend imputation tax system and its implications for corporate treasury goals and operations
  9. evaluate treasury management systems and other decision support systems
  10. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with corporate treasury management and demonstrate in both individual and group summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5250.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0504, 2619, 3189, 3818, 3850 or 4412 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5250


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit will combine classroom teaching and direct observance experience of the money markets covering background to the money markets, participants, interest rate and exchange rate determination, instruments traded in the money and currency markets, strategies and money and currency market trading operations. The simulated treasury dealing room (STARLab) will be used extensively in this course. This is a specialist, practically oriented unit where attendance is compulsory as assessment is based on classroom activities. An understanding of commercial banking and treasury management is required.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse dealing practices and conventions in the foreign exchange market and cash market
  2. develop and organise the front office and back office functions of a simulated bank's treasury dealing room
  3. plan, verify and settle transactions completed in the simulated treasury dealing room
  4. create and modify dealing strategies in the treasury dealing room
  5. plan, organise, analyse, justify and report on positions taken in the treasury dealing room.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF5230, BFF5230, or BFF5926 before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course , 0504, 2619, 3189, 3818, 3850 or 4412 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5260


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit focuses on funds management styles and philosophies; approaches to implementing investment strategies for funds design and decision making; practical allocation of assets across and within different markets (industries); market sector volatilities and risk management; and performance measurement. Current academic research and trends in the industry are also considered from local and global funds management perspectives.

The topics include:

  • portfolio investment styles, philosophies, mandates and policies
  • capital market expectations
  • asset allocation and portfolio optimisation
  • management of fixed income portfolios
  • international diversification
  • alternative investments
  • quantitative portfolio factor models
  • portfolio monitoring and rebalancing
  • portfolio performance, attribution and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge of the global funds management industry, its management philosophies, strategies and styles
  2. compare and contrast approaches to funds design and decision making in terms of fund allocation, portfolio optimisation and portfolio monitoring, along with current trends in the funds management industry
  3. develop skills of summarising, critically analysing and assessing, ranking, reporting and, presenting the current performance of funds managers
  4. develop the capability to work effectively in a group and demonstrate effective research and problem solving skills to produce quality investment portfolio analysis
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the rudiments of fund management both in theory and in practice as detailed in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0504, 2619, 3189, 3818, 3850 or 4412 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5270


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include managing interest rate risk; foreign exchange risk; liquidity risk and the cash flow cycle; credit risk; capital risk; debt and investment risk and managing the risk of derivative products.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop critical skills in understanding, analysing and applying concepts and models such as VAR Model, RAROC Model, Z-score etc. which provide assistance for managing bank's assets and liability risks
  2. develop an understanding of the application of regulatory measures taken by Reserve bank of Australia , APRA and BIS for improvement of risk management in the banking industry
  3. explain the link between theory and real world situation in the areas of market risk, interest rate risks, foreign exchange risks, credit risks, liquidity risks and operation risk faced by banks
  4. develop writing and presentation skills by requiring the submission of group assignments relating to existing practices followed by the banks
  5. develop an ability to work independently by requiring presentation of tutorials answers relating to risk management by the financial institutions
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5280.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0504, 2619, 3189, 3818, 3850 or 4412 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5280


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Nick Stavrou

Synopsis

This unit is intended to allow students to achieve learning and skills in advanced topics in applied derivatives and quantitative finance. This course is designed to explore topics for which the basic options and derivatives pricing prior study has already laid the foundations. It builds on existing knowledge of derivatives and asset pricing models, and seeks to evaluate and apply numeral methods in finance, continuous time finance, term structure models, the Greeks, credit derivatives, interest rate derivatives, option pricing models, exchange rate derivatives, interest rate parity and the value at risk. Asset pricing-methods are applied to the pricing of vanilla and exotic options and corporate liabilities, forwards, futures, as well as fixed income and FX derivatives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop advanced numerical methods and quantitative finance skills useful in pricing derivative instruments
  2. develop skills in the pricing of derivatives beyond the basic Black Scholes and binomial models
  3. critically evaluate and apply advanced models such as the heath-arrow models
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced derivatives and quantitative finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BFF5915 or AFF9150 AND BFF5040 or AFF5040 AND ETF9300 or ETF5930 before undertaking this unit

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3818, 3850 or 4412 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit is intended to consolidate and apply the technical learning achieved in the core units of the Master of Applied Finance, to attain real industry experiences. This will be achieved by using a selection of targeted case studies that highlight the issues likely to be encountered in industry.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the ability to identify problems, to synthesise, analyse, and summarise quantitative and qualitative information
  2. evaluate and weigh evidence, arguments and ethics
  3. apply specialist skills and knowledge to global business issues and to work out solutions to practitioner issues
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group
  5. demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to address financial issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr John Watson (First semester)
Professor Jonathan Batten (Second semester)

Prerequisites

AFF5040 or BFF5040

Co-requisites

Student must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3818, 3850 or 4412.

Prohibitions

AFF5300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit will combine a theoretical, practical and case study approach to the principles surrounding project finance incorporating: the environment surrounding approaches to project finance; the market for project finance; project characteristics; risk analysis and risk management; the role of an advisor in a project finance deal; valuing the project and project cash flow analysis; financing the deal; legal aspects of project finance and; credit risk in project finance transactions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the theoretical and practical aspects of project finance
  2. develop the ability to identify problems, to synthesise, analyse, and summarise quantitative and qualitative information in project finance
  3. evaluate and weigh evidence, arguments and ethics related to project finance
  4. apply specialist skills and knowledge to project finance issues and to create solutions to practitioner issues
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group
  6. demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to address project finance issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFX9540 or BFF5954


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit develops knowledge and improves skills in credit risk modelling by using market information to predict defaulted firms. The topics discussed will provide an understanding of their relative merits, the issues involved in their implementation and their use in the pricing and risk management of credit risk. This unit assists practitioners and students alike to understand better the use of credit risk models and moves them away from the proverbial Black Box scenario.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop credit risk modelling using Altman and Ohlson models
  2. develop an understanding of credit risk modelling approaches
  3. analyse the Merton structural model and implications for credit analysis
  4. analyse the term structure of credit spreads and probabilities of default
  5. analyse implications of alternative ways to model recovery
  6. develop correlations between default rates and recovery
  7. develop copula based approach to modelling default dependence
  8. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with credit risk modelling and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5380.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF9140, BFF5914, ETF5930 or ETF9300 before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3818, 4412 or 3850 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5380


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Andrew Child

Synopsis

This unit provides advanced skills in financial planning, construction of a plan, and review of the plan. Coverage includes: preparation of various financial planning documents including the Financial Services Guide, Privacy Statement and Statement of Advice; aspects of the client relationship; gathering data and identifying goals, objectives and financial issues; assessing strategies, preparing recommendations, and writing the Statement of Advice; implementing the plan; reviewing, updating and maintaining the plan.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a practical understanding at an advanced level of various important and topical subjects in financial planning, with emphasis on client and practice issues such as: setting up a practice, gaining and maintaining a licence, dealing with clients, handling compliance issues and ethics, superannuation, portfolio management, salary packaging, internal and external complaints handling, insurance and risk management, estate planning and behavioural finance in financial planning
  2. develop skills in analysis and problem solving that are critical in satisfying client objectives and in finalising the preparation of Statements of Advice (SoAs)
  3. develop skills in effectively managing and communicating with clients through research into current issues and reporting of results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFF9130 or BFF5913

Prohibitions

AFF5390


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Roger Love

Quota applies

This unit has an enrolment quota of 40.

Synopsis

This unit examines the concept of mergers and acquisitions from two perspectives - the relevant areas of finance and the basic taxation, accounting and legal issues. The aim is to provide students with a practical understanding of this major corporate strategy. The finance issues will involve an examination of basic theory and empirical findings associated with mergers and acquisitions, the valuation of firms under a range of techniques, the structuring of bids from a financing perspective and defensive strategies. The taxation, accounting and legal issues include a review of the taxation effects from the position of both the bidder and the target's shareholders, the legal responsibilities of the Board and senior management of both target and bidder companies, the role of the Takeover Panel in relation to both defensive and negotiating strategies, the use of independent experts, the application of the Trade Practices Act and the effect of the accounting asset impairment tests.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of mergers and acquisitions in terms of the legal and economic consequences
  2. evaluate the impact of mergers and acquisitions on the participating parties
  3. describe the differences between mergers, hostile acquisitions and private equity involvement
  4. communicate clearly and in an organised manner the findings from both case studies and academic studies on the issues raised in the preceding goals
  5. critically analyse the strategies and financial worth of a nominated M & A corporate example
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with mergers and acquisitions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFF5580.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Student must be enrolled in course 3818, 4412 or 3850, or by permission of the Chief Examiner.

Prohibitions

AFF5580


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gujji Muthuswamy

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the business, regulatory and economic perspectives of climate change mitigation. It investigates how market and regulatory initiatives to mitigate greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions by carbon pricing mechanisms can be managed by liable businesses and other stakeholders, by examining the following:

  • climate change science
  • economic impacts of climate change
  • international initiatives to mitigate GHG emissions
  • investment in low-emissions technologies
  • carbon pricing regulatory regimes and market trading mechanisms
  • measurement of business carbon footprint
  • industry sector interactions with carbon markets and regulatory regimes
  • accounting issues arising from pricing GHG emissions.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of climate change mitigation with respect to political, environmental, regulatory and economic impacts on business in the Australian and global context
  2. acquire a working knowledge of the main market and regulatory mechanisms for mitigating GHG emissions
  3. evaluate the supply and demand side aspects of industries that are the principal GHG emitters and their capacity to mitigate such emissions
  4. assess the likely strategies that can be employed by businesses to comply with, and manage, carbon pricing obligations at least cost
  5. acquire practical research skills including the ability to work in groups of diverse cultural and social backgrounds and investigate academic, institutional and public media sources
  6. demonstrate the ability to evaluate, formulate, and articulate justifiable business strategies and tactics to address the impacts of market and regulatory changes arising from climate change in a summative assessment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF9012


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Warren Gillian

Synopsis

This unit is designed to introduce the concept of risk as a business philosophy and to introduce students to the Australian Risk Management Standard, AS/NZS/ISO31000:2009. It will look at the evolution of risk, the requirements for risk management, the risk management process and steps, and the application of risk management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the scope, application and definition of risk
  2. explain the risk management requirements needed of a business entity of the 21st century
  3. compare and contrast the risk management process with existing approaches to governance, compliance and control
  4. link the risk approach to effective business control, by reference to AS/NZS/ISO31000:2009
  5. understand the steps and the logic of the sequence
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5902.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF9020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

The unit develops an understanding of planning; financing; investing and financial management aspects of new businesses. In addition, it introduces the participant to statutory reporting issues prescribed by regulators. New ventures have special financial characteristics requiring a different approach to financing. Managers need to understand the real enterprise value that is being created so as to provide the intended returns for the resources and risk involved. This unit will address the knowledge and basic skills required by leaders for the financial management of a science and technology business to support strategic management goals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and apply financial planning skills involved in making investment decisions including the use of tools such as Excel
  2. understand the financial theories and processes involved in finance decisions and options
  3. develop an understanding of the key entrepreneurial finance issues which includes valuation of science and technology oriented start-ups and related financing processes and options
  4. evaluate and discuss the interpretation of financial reports
  5. compare and contrast the financial management processes necessary to efficiently and effectively manage a science and technology business without stifling innovation
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5904.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

GSB9004 or AFX9003 or ACX5903 or ACX9003

Prohibitions

AFX9004


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Andrew Child

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to financial planning. Coverage includes: the legislative and economic environment; the role of financial service advisers; licensing and disclosure; investment strategies, products, and related taxation implications, with particular reference to securities and managed investments; social security; superannuation, pensions and other retirement issues; estate planning; and the financial planning process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe financial planning activities and legal compliance requirements for financial planners
  2. develop specialist skills required for interaction with financial planning clients; this will recognise an ethical dimension to the giving of financial planning advice
  3. demonstrate knowledge of the Australian and global investment environments, together with specialist knowledge in the areas of superannuation, financial planning, securities and managed investments
  4. evaluate clients' financial objectives and prepare appropriate financial plans
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the nature of financial planning and its design for individual clients.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFC3440, BFC3440, AFF3111, BFF3111, AFF9130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include the credit risk assessment process; accounting fundamentals; reading financial statements (including ratio analysis); using budgeted financial statements (including breakeven analysis, what-if analysis and variance analysis); creative accounting; technical accounting update; business structures; current issues in insolvency and loan security.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the basic principles governing bank lending
  2. develop an understanding of the framework within which bank lending decisions are made
  3. develop an understanding of the analysis of financial statement of a company
  4. develop analytical skills with regard to the management of credit risk and its measurement techniques
  5. develop an understanding of new bank lending product development and its marketing
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5914.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF9140


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Malaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit examines how options and futures can be used for hedging risk in the process of risk management. Several aspects of risk management are examined, including the reasons why investors indulge in this activity, how value is created via risk management, and the firm-wide approach to risk management (given that any firm is exposed to a wide variety of risks). Once the importance of risk management has been established, emphasis turns to the use of derivatives (futures and options) to manage risk. To understand how they are used to manage risk, the unit also considers the characteristics and pricing of these instruments, including some exotic versions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the financial risk management function and its evolution in the corporate world
  2. understand the characteristics of futures and options markets and be able to apply these instruments so as to hedge the risk exposure of the firm
  3. design appropriate risk management strategies using options and futures for hedging and speculation
  4. demonstrate effective research skills to produce a professional quality business report recommending a solution to a risk management problem
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of derivative instruments in financial markets, both the mechanism of their operation and their application in hedging risk exposures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Binh Do (First semester)
Dr Andrew Sanford (Second semester)

Co-requisites

Only students enrolled in one of the following courses may undertake this unit:
0028, 0396, 0503, 0504, 0790, 0826, 1445, 1499, 1679, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3189, 3818, 3822, 3843, 3844, 3848, 3850 or 4412.

Prohibitions

AFF5290, AFF3751, BFF3751, AFF9150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include the latest international banking regulatory concerns, geographic focus of banking in Europe, Asia and less developed economies; the European monetary system; Euromarkets; trade finance and trade facilitation agencies; country risk analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse characteristics of international banking and consider the rational of domestic banks to expand overseas by researching and applying topics that are generally outside the typical finance undergraduate curriculum
  2. develop an understanding of the financial structure of countries and apply that understanding to a particular country to report potential international banking opportunities based on a country's current financial structure
  3. research, evaluate and report on a current international banking issue
  4. demonstrate an awareness of the complex and changing nature of Euro zone banking
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with international banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5916.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF9160


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include review of foundations of finance; financial mathematics and pricing of financial instruments; valuation and the management of long term investment and financial leverage; and theory of capital structure and dividend policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the foundations of finance and be able to apply pricing models to the valuation of equity and debt instruments in global markets
  2. evaluate investment proposals using capital budgeting techniques
  3. formulate capital structure and dividend policies consistent with entities' objectives
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to solve problems related to current issues in financial management
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zoltan Murglov (First semester)
Dr Hannah Nguyen (Second semester)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 0028, 0396, 0503, 0504, 1445, 1499, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3189, 3822, 3844 or 3848.

Prohibitions

AFG9070, BFG5970, AFX9540, BFF5954, AFX9590, BFM5959, BFS5959, BFZ5959, AFF9250


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include development of money and financial markets and financial flows analysis; intermediation; economic role of the different financial institutions; determination of interest rates and yield curve analysis in financial markets; exchange rates and money supply; sources of short-term, medium-term and long-term finance; sources of overseas borrowing; an introduction to interest rate and exchange rate management; performance of the financial system.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast specific types of financial institutions, instruments and markets in order to explain the distinctions between their operations, usage and regulation
  2. critically evaluate the assumptions and conventional wisdom relating to the term structure of interest rates and foreign exchange rates
  3. develop academic skills by accessing electronic data sources and hard copy references to evaluate a case study assignment
  4. develop an ability to work in a team by requiring syndicates to submit written solutions to assigned case studies, and thereby demonstrate effective interpersonal communication skills and develop a team orientated approach to work effectively as a team member to produce a professional quality business document solving financial institution related issues
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the components and functioning of capital markets in an open economy as exemplified by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michael Skully (First Semester)
Dr Zoltan Murglov (Second Semester)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit:
0028, 0396, 0503, 0504, 0790, 0826, 1445, 1499, 1822, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3189, 3822, 3843, 3844 or 3848.

Prohibitions

AFF9260


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include investment markets and investment strategies; measuring investment return and risk; capital asset pricing model; arbitrage pricing theory; taxation; shares and share analysis; valuation; financial futures markets; real estate; portfolio management; asset allocation; monitoring.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate financial market information to measure investment risk and return, and be able to incorporate such evaluation in fundamental and technical analysis in the asset valuation process
  2. assess portfolio management performance
  3. understand the relevance of behavioural finance, including an awareness of financial history as it relates to behavioural finance
  4. demonstrate effective interpersonal communication skills and develop a team orientated approach to work effectively as a team member to produce a professional quality business document solving portfolio investment objectives
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the components of an investment portfolio and their optimal combination as discussed throughout the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Francis In (First semester)
Dr Daniel Chai (Second semester)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 0396, 0503, 0504, 0790, 0826, 1445, 1499, 1679, 1822, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3822, 3843, 3844, 3848, 4401 or 4402.

Prohibitions

AFF9350


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit covers corporate finance concepts and theories at an introductory level. Students will be expected to be able to master basic calculations involving share and bond valuations, NPV and IRR, company cost of capital, etc. and to use them in determining whether investment projects should proceed as well as the value of companies. They will also expected to be able to interpret the results and to discuss basic issues and theories appropriate to an introductory level unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the foundations of finance
  2. apply pricing models to the valuation of equity and debt instruments in global markets
  3. evaluate investment proposals using capital budgeting techniques
  4. formulate capital structure and dividend policies consistent with firms' objectives
  5. demonstrate effective individual technical skills to construct accounting records and financial statements for a unique business; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in 0503 or have passed ETF5900.

Prohibitions

AFF9250, BFF5925, AFF9641, AFG9044, BFG5944, AFX9641, AFX9540


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFF5959.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 2098 or 4411 to enrol in this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX9590 and BFM5959


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedMalaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include working capital management, capital budgeting and funding decisions (capital structure and cost of capital) incorporating the identification of foreign exchange risks and their management as well as their financial reporting implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify motives and evaluate strategies for foreign direct investment
  2. understand the impact of and strategies to manage risks associated with international business
  3. acquire a sound knowledge of issues surrounding the financing of international business
  4. develop oral presentation skills in communicating complexities surrounding international business
  5. develop an ability to work independently, lead and participate in teams from diverse cultural and social backgrounds by producing a presentation relating to an international business issue
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5973.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF9160, BFF5916, AFF9730


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jason Choo

Synopsis

This unit considers characteristics of property investment, valuation of real estate assets, real estate market analysis, the demand and supply of built space, property cycles and the economy, measurement of risk and return, indices and pricing models, the use of leverage and taxation, the analysis of commercial leases, the role of property in mixed asset portfolios, listed and unlisted property trusts, mortgage funds and the use of real options.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse investments in real asset classes with particular emphasis on property
  2. critically examine the different types of property, characteristics of property markets, the role of professional investors and managers and the nature of investment vehicles employed
  3. relate property cycles and the role of property in investment portfolios
  4. evaluate property based on risk of cash flows
  5. develop critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with property investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFF5975.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3818, 3850 or 4412.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Tony Cusack

Synopsis

Topics include the evaluation of risk; financing tools; retention and transfer; insurance; non insurance; pre and post loss funding; retention and self insurance decisions; insurance and reinsurance principles and practices for the corporate buyer; deductible selection models; management and administration of losses and insurance claims; institutional factors, accounting factors, including taxation and government incentives; captive insurance companies; international considerations; financial transfer by contract.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop critical skills in understanding, analysing and applying concepts and models relating to risk management by the treasury of an organisation
  2. develop an understanding of optimum capital structure, maximisation of firm value and investment risk management faced by the treasury
  3. explain the link between theory of derivative products, insurance products and credit derivatives such as securitisation and the real world situation
  4. develop writing and presentation skills by requiring the submission of group assignments relating to existing practices followed by the banks
  5. develop the ability to work independently by requiring presentation of tutorials answers relating to risk management by the financial institutions
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5977.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFF9770


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 2098 Master of International Business.

Prohibitions

AFX9590, ACM5959, BFF5959, BFS5959, BFZ5959


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Term 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFS5959.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

AFX9590, BFF5959, BFM5959, BFZ5959


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to research methodologies used in finance and will prepare a research proposal. The primary focus is on understanding the process of scientific research, which includes topic identification, literature review, hypothesis development, data requirements and appropriate empirical methodologies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare a research proposal in finance
  2. prepare a literature review that demonstrates knowledge of essential literature
  3. develop research questions and testable hypotheses
  4. devise empirical methodologies appropriate for testing the research hypotheses
  5. develop technical and computing skills that facilitate research
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75%
Examination: 25%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit has two key components. The first half covers aspects of theoretical and empirical financial modelling, including modelling the stock price behaviour, consumption-based asset pricing models, multifactor models, two beta, ICAPM, intertemporal asset pricing models, mean-variance frontier and beta representations, bayesian alphas and mutual fund persistence, a bayesian and bootstrap analysis, performance measures of the hedge fund returns. The second half covers technical skills in building Excel models to solve problems in Finance. The aim is to bridge the gap between financial theory and practice. To achieve this, students will learn modelling skills in Excel and be introduced to VBA programming concepts and techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply advanced knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop advanced skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4030.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4030


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this course is to develop critical economic reasoning and understanding of important empirical regularities in corporate finance. This unit builds on introductory corporate finance studies and analyses a variety of issues by introducing a study of recent empirical literature. There is a strong focus on research with a selective and critical examination of theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance. The advanced topics covered include market efficiency and event studies, security offerings, corporate takeovers, and capital structure, dividend policy, corporate governance and financial tunnelling.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of empirical findings in corporate finance
  2. develop an ability to conceptualise and analyse issues in corporate finance at a sound level of understanding and be in a position to make a significant contribution in setting firm financial policy
  3. critically evaluate underlying theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments in corporate financial theory
  4. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind recent academic research and the possible extension to the recent research
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4060.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4060


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit draws on the academic literature to provide a study of a range of topics relating to banking and finance. It presents a basis for students intending to undertake research into banking and related finance questions. Topics covered include theory of financial intermediation, risk management, efficiency assessment, competition modelling and bank regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss existing theory in the field of banking and its evolution
  2. critically assess the usefulness and limitations of this theory in the field of banking
  3. apply this theory to relevant current policy issues
  4. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in banking
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in banking and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4080.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4080


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an advanced applied perspective to a broad range of research methodology and testing procedures used in accounting and finance research. Students who have completed this unit should, at an advanced level, be able to collect qualitative and quantitative data using a variety of research techniques; to apply advanced statistical techniques to the analysis of quantitative data; to design non-probability and probability samples; to deal with advanced issues in cross-sectional, panel and time series data and to conduct research ethically.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain advanced research methods used in accounting and finance research
  2. perform advanced statistical and econometrics tests and procedures for data analysis
  3. identify topical research issues, research designs and advanced methods used in accounting and finance research
  4. develop critical skills of summarising, analysing, reporting and presenting quantitative and/or qualitative data and research results
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced research methods.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

AFX4000 or ACX4000

Prohibitions

AFX4110


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit will examine empirical research in asset pricing and investments. It will develop students knowledge and ability to apply empirical techniques to conduct research in asset pricing and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse research papers examining current issues in asset pricing and investments
  2. critically evaluate research methodologies applicable to empirical finance research
  3. demonstrate an ability to conduct research in asset pricing and investments
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to research methodologies used in finance and will prepare a research proposal. The primary focus is on understanding the process of scientific research, which includes topic identification, literature review, hypothesis development, data requirements and appropriate empirical methodologies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare a research proposal in finance
  2. prepare a literature review that demonstrates knowledge of essential literature
  3. develop research questions and testable hypotheses
  4. devise empirical methodologies appropriate for testing the research hypotheses
  5. develop technical and computing skills that facilitate research
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX5000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75%
Examination: 25%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3818 OR 4412 and have the permission of the Course Coordinator (or delegate) to undertake this unit.


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3818 OR 4412 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
Monash Passport categoryInternational Short Field Experience (Explore Program)
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

The unit is designed to impart an understanding and appreciation of the current issues underlying the International area of finance, and to develop a practical understanding of the markets and the financial techniques used within the markets. To encourage research techniques for a specialised topic within the financial markets area. To develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international banking and finance through an overseas visitation program.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. become skilled in understanding the history and structure of International banking and financial markets
  2. acquire an understanding of the theories and usage of International foreign exchange markets
  3. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international banking and finance through an overseas visitation program
  4. develop a set of academic skills which include the ability to work independently, evaluate academic papers in terms of the application of finance theories to the International financial markets, search the web and to submit assignments on time
  5. develop excellent oral and written communication skills to be able to analyse case studies and to lead/participate in groups from diverse cultural and social backgrounds.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the unit coordinator before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX5860


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Banking and Finance
OfferedSuzhou First semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFZ5959.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

Students who have completed BFM5959, BFF5959, BFS5959 or AFX9590, or enrolled in courses 0748, 0503, 0790, 0826, 3850, 4401, 4402 and 3843 are prohibited from enrolling in this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Abe Herzberg (First semester); Dr Phillip Lipton (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an appreciation of best corporate governance practices from a global perspective. It considers the reasons for the interest in corporate governance and compares and contrasts the various international corporate governance systems and best practice models; roles and functions of the board of directors, board committees and the board's relationship with management are explored from both a legal and management perspective; empirical studies of the relationship between corporate governance and corporate performance, and the role and legal duties of directors in takeover and insolvency contexts. Corporate governance issues in Asia are also analysed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the theories upon which corporate governance models are based, including the legal, economics and management perspectives of these theories
  2. evaluate the various international corporate governance systems and best practice models
  3. define the roles and functions of the board of directors and the board's relationship with management, shareholders and other stakeholders
  4. analyse the way in which corporate law, historical factors and economic institutions affect corporate governance
  5. critically analyse various aspects of corporate governance best practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX5320, BTX5000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alice de Jonge

Synopsis

Trade and investment regimes affecting enterprises operating in the Asian region. International and regional trade conventions. Business and investment laws of selected Asian nations. Topics covered include national development planning; the political context of international trade and investment; import/export regulation; foreign investment regimes, corporate governance, prudential regulation in East Asia and dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the history and current operation of regional trade and investment agreements in Asia
  2. describe and demonstrate an understanding of the historical, economic and political context of national legal systems in selected Asian jurisdictions (Malaysia, Indonesia, China and Hong Kong)
  3. identify and describe the operation of the institutions responsible for the administration of commercial laws in selection Asian jurisdictions
  4. have used accepted legal research methodology to examine in detail their choice from a number of specialised topics related to commercial law in one or more Asian jurisdictions
  5. identify, analyse and propose possible resolutions to legal issues arising from the conduct of business activities in one or more selected Asian jurisdictions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTX5050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop knowledge and skills, and an understanding of the relationship between the common law, statute law and awards and agreements. In this regard, the unit introduces students to the central tenets of the contract of employment including the formation of the contract, breach of contract and wrongful dismissal, confidentiality, restrictive covenants, employee/independent contractor issues and discrimination law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a wide range of legal issues affecting the employment relationship, with a particular focus on the contract of employment
  2. illustrate the practical implications of employment law by identifying emerging issues in the media, the workplace and the case law
  3. apply the legal principles from relevant cases to hypothetical scenarios
  4. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (take-home): 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTG9241, BTX9060


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alice De Jonge

Synopsis

The unit examines the principles of international law governing the legal relations between international states or other international legal persons. To this end a study will be made of the sources of international law and the relationship of international and municipal law. Specifically, the course will outline the principles relating to territory, personality, state responsibility, recognition, jurisdiction, air, space and sea law, dispute settlement and the law of treaties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the distinctive nature of international law and some of its basic doctrines and subject areas
  2. identify the sources of international law, and explain the principles which govern the use of those sources
  3. describe the structures and institutions of international law, and be able to use the vocabulary of international law
  4. analyse the increasing impact of international law on Australian domestic law, as well as on the domestic legal systems of other states
  5. demonstrate a capacity to conduct research on, and to critically analyse, a specific aspect of public international law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTX5130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Sugden

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop an understanding of the legal and administrative framework governing the regulation of competition and consumer protection, including the operations of the Regulator. The unit also aims to develop an understanding of industrial property law (patents, copyright, designs and trade marks), particularly an ability to recognise and make the choices that confront commercial entities when implementing an effective industrial property policy. Finally, the unit aims to develop an understanding of the manner in which domestic regulation forms part of international regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify, analyse and apply laws designed to protect consumers
  2. identify, analyse and apply intellectual property principles and apply these to the development, marketing and protection of products, knowledge and ideas
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices.

Assessment

Seminar presentation and paper (1500 words): 15%
Research paper (4000 words): 35%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTF9150, BTX9150, BTX9890,


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor John Gillespie

Synopsis

The unit will introduce students to the theories about the globalization of law. Using a series of cases studies it aims to show how global laws are adopted and reinterpreted in key domestic legal systems in Asia. The unit will also demonstrate the local constraints on the globalization of law and offer reasons why legal and regulatory systems in Asian are not necessarily converging with those in the West.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the historical, economic and political context of domestic legal systems in selected Asian countries (China, Indonesia, Malaysia, Japan)
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in the interaction between global regulation and domestic regulation in developing countries in Asia
  3. gain a greater insight into the role of global regulation in the Asia Pacific region
  4. critically apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of the students choice
  5. develop general legal research and academic skills
  6. develop presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Chenxia Shi

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed study of the theoretical perspectives of business law and regulation in China. Some of the specific topics of the unit include business organizations in China, company law, securities law, fund management law, contract law, copyright law, and bankruptcy law. This unit will provide students with broad policy perspectives on these topics in a nutshell and practical guidance on compliance issues concerning Chinese business law and regulation when doing business in China.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend business culture and underlying principles of business law and regulation in China
  2. develop good understanding of cultural, political and social factors in shaping business regulation in China
  3. acquire knowledge of specific substantive areas of Chinese business law
  4. critically analyse key issues of Chinese business law and the manner in which law regulates commercial activities in China
  5. evaluate broad policy perspectives on the issues studied, informed by comparative approach in legal analysis
  6. improve student research, writing and presentation skills through an extended opportunity to write and present research assignments in a chosen topic or area by the students.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrew Serpell

Synopsis

A study of some of the laws regulating securities and financial markets from the policy perspective of what they are trying to achieve. The unit opens with the economic, legal and constitutional framework. Topics include the role of the market regulator; what is a 'security'; aspects of securities regulation legislation; relevant trade practices law; licensing; computerisation and internationalisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the regulation of financial markets
  2. analyse the economic, legal and constitutional framework of financial services
  3. critically evaluate the regulation roles of securities commissions and stock exchanges
  4. evaluate the impact of competition law, computerisation and internationalisation on the financial services sectors.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTX4180, BTX5180


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Ken Devos

Synopsis

The Workplace and Investment Taxation Unit introduces students to CGT and GST issues, which flow from making investments. It provides students with a thorough analysis of the main types of entity structures from an investment perspective. Specific topics include: the taxation of partnerships, trusts, companies and shareholders. The unit covers the most common taxation issues faced by employees, contractors and employers in the workplace. Also covered are tax administration, employee/contractor distinction, the Personal Services Income (PSI) regime, salary packaging, superannuation and employee share schemes (ESS).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the CGT and GST legislation to investment problems and identify solutions
  2. explain implications and calculate taxable income received by partnerships, trusts, companies, contractors and investors
  3. describe the administrative aspects of the income tax system
  4. explain the tax implications of superannuation and employee share schemes provided by employers
  5. calculate the tax position of employees and independent contractors in the workplace who receive fringe benefits and other types of remuneration.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

BTF4230, BTF5230, BTF4240, BTF5240


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Nicola Charwat

Synopsis

This unit will explore regional trade governance, with a special focus on the Asia, Asia-Pacific and Australasian regions. Topics addressed in the unit include; what is regional trade governance; regional dispute settlement; how are regional trade agreements made, who by and for whose benefit; the relationship between regional trade agreements and the global/multilateral regime; the extent to which regional trade governance impacts on the internal politics and law of participating nation states; whether regional trade governance manages the interface between trade and social goals effectively, for example, should regional trade agreements include provisions to actively promote developmental, environmental, health and other public interest goals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the framework of regional trade governance arrangements and dispute settlement processes
  2. understand how and why regional trade agreements are made and the role of states, market factors and civil society in the process
  3. understand the relationship between regional trade agreements and the global multilateral regime
  4. assess the impact of regional trade agreements on participating states and the interface between regional trade agreements and objectives, such as developmental, environmental and public health goals.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Phillip Lipton

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an understanding of the general law of corporations within the Australian regulatory context. The focus of this unit is on the nature of a corporation and its governance structure as a means of carrying out business. The unit examines the role of the corporation in society, its relationship to shareholders, creditors, the regulator and the community and includes topics which address the concept of limited liability, director's duties, shareholder remedies and corporate insolvency.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the significance and functions of corporations and trusts as legal structures that facilitate the carrying on of business
  2. identify, explain and apply legislation and case law to the internal and external regulations of corporations and operation of trusts
  3. develop skills in problem solving and analyse legal problems relating to corporations and trusts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

BTF5903 unless enrolled in course 0503.

Prohibitions

BTG9220, BTX9020, BTF5950


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Arup (First semester); Professor Vincenzo Morabito (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit requires students to formulate a research topic on a business law related area of study and complete an approximately 8,000 word research project. Seminars will be conducted at which students will present progress and final reports on their research projects. The seminars will also include practical research and academic skills sessions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enable students to apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of their choice
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in a business law area
  3. demonstrate legal research and presentation skills and the ability to critically analyse legal issues have been acquired
  4. develop and further build upon general legal research and academic skills
  5. further build upon presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Research project (8,000 words): 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Arup (First semester)
Professor Vincenzo Morabito (Second semester)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that this unit be undertaken in the last semester of study for the Master of Business Law.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Samantha Taylor

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop knowledge and skills relating to the legal principles which underpin contemporary human resource management issues. It includes consideration of such matters as recruitment and selection, contract of employment issues, performance appraisal, equal opportunity and anti-discrimination, termination of employment, remuneration, rewards and employee benefits, employee health and safety and related HRM issues. The unit takes a practical approach to these matters and focuses specifically on practical case studies and decisions of the Courts and Tribunals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a wide range of legal issues affecting the human resources practitioner
  2. illustrate the practical implications of the law in the area of human resources management by identifying emerging issues in the media, the workplace and the case law
  3. apply the legal principles from relevant cases to hypothetical scenarios involving human resources management issues
  4. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTF9841, BTX9841, BTX5841


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield Winter semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Jonathan Teoh

Synopsis

An introduction to the Chinese taxation system. Topics include: the legal framework and governing authorities; Turnover Tax (Value Added Tax and Excise Tax); Business Tax, Enterprise Income Tax; and Individual Income Tax and tax incentives.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of, and appreciation for the regulatory environment of the Chinese tax system, including the brief history of the Chinese tax system
  2. analyse and apply China's tax laws in given factual situations for individual and business/corporate taxpayers
  3. analyse and apply Chinese tax incentives under Value Added Tax (VAT) on the sale of goods, Business Tax (BT) on the supply of services, Enterprise Income Tax (EIT) and Individual Income Tax (IIT)
  4. develop a practical knowledge of the Chinese tax implications arising from Australian taxpayers investing in China
  5. learn how to calculate the VAT, EIT, BT and IIT liability of Chinese taxpayers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Nicola Charwat

Synopsis

Under supervision students are expected to undertake and report on an original research project that addresses a significant issue (or issues) in business law; this research proposal is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications; as well, it is hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate peer-refereed journal.

Assessment

Research dissertation (12,000 - 15,000 words): 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

MBL program


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tabatha Pettitt

Synopsis

This unit examines business law in practice, including:

  • negotiation techniques, applying contract law
  • legal risk management techniques, applying the law of negligence, statutory consumer law protections and occupational health and safety
  • choosing the most appropriate business form and complying with requirements, applying corporations law, the law of partnerships, agency and sole traders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use a business-focused approach to the law to develop skills in:
    • assessing the legal risks faced by the business
    • avoiding those legal risks
    • going beyond mere legal compliance by developing sound processes
  2. develop strong practical negotiating skills to assist students to:
    • negotiate what they need for their business
    • create strong relationships
    • limit liabilities
  3. develop an understanding of business entities to be able to critically:
    • determine the most appropriate legal form
    • understand the benefits and problems with each legal form
    • develop good corporate governance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTG9270, BTX5950, BTX9020, MBA9002, BTX5140, BTX9030


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Wayne Gumley

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the regulatory framework supporting a transition to ecologically sustainable development in Australia, including an introduction to the Australian legal system and the role of international law, key principles of common law and relevant statutory schemes for protection of biodiversity, and regulation of pollution, urban and regional planning, environmental impact assessment and regulatory responses to climate change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and understand the regulatory framework supporting a transition to ecologically sustainable development in Australia
  2. identify and analyse the application of the principles of ecologically sustainable at common law and under statutory regimes
  3. understand the environmental responsibilities of industry and business managers in local and global transactions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTX9100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Mathews Thomas (First semester); Dr Jadranka Petrovic (Second semester)

Synopsis

Topics include law of international trade, including rights and duties in international sales transactions; legal regimes governing contracts for carriage of goods internationally; distribution agreements; legal aspects of financing international trade; shipping documents, documentary collections and letters of credit; marine and aviation insurance; international dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. recognise and understand the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letters of credit
  3. identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods and finance of international trade in a variety of situations
  5. write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mathews Thomas (First semester)
Dr Jadranka Petrovic (Second semester)

Prohibitions

BTX5190, LAW7028, LAW7209, BTX9190


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gerald Williams

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the important areas of business law and corporations law. The topics include contract law, negligence, trade practices legislation, agency, characteristics of a company, directors' duties, share capital, members' remedies and corporate insolvency.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in business law and the regulation of companies and how they may be applied
  2. identify the important features and characteristics of companies as a form of business organisation
  3. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  4. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 0748, 0790, 0826, 1822, 3843, 3849, 4402, 3174.

Prohibitions

BTX9020, BTX9541, MBA9002, BTX9500


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Wayne Gumley (First semester); Mr Toan Le(Second semester)

Synopsis

The unit covers the concepts of income taxation and the taxation of capital gains in their underlying historical, social and constitutional contexts. It includes discussion and learning of the policy and constitutional matrices of taxation, the legal definition of income, taxation of income from personal services and business, taxation of fringe benefits, indirect taxation of goods and services, taxation of capital gains, taxation of companies and allowable deductions from gross income in personal and business contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify conceptual structures in the core income tax provisions and apply them in an ordered approach
  2. understand fundamental tax concepts to determine income and deductions, and together with appropriate judicial principles, apply them to personal, business and property scenarios
  3. calculate income tax, CGT and GST liabilities; and the taxable value of fringe benefits
  4. understand the operation of the taxation system; the interaction of GST with other taxes; and some tax accounting principles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley (First semester)
Mr Toan Le (Second semester)

Prohibitions

BTG9270 and BTX9651


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Loganathan Krishnan

Synopsis

Topics cover both public and private international trade law, including the WTO and dispute settlement within its framework; rights and duties in international sales transactions; legal regimes governing contracts for carriage of goods internationally and the rights and duties arising there under; legal aspects of financing international trade through documentary collections and letters of credit; marine insurance; and international dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. recognise and understand the nature and purpose of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange and letters of credit
  3. identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods, international finance and marine insurance in a variety of practical situations
  5. write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal implications of the issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTF5919, BTS5919, BTX5190, BTX9190, LAW7028, LAW7209


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Sarah-Lynn Tennant

Synopsis

Topics cover both public and private international trade law, including the WTO and dispute settlement within its framework; rights and duties in international sales transactions; legal regimes governing contracts for carriage of goods internationally and the rights and duties arising there under; legal aspects of financing international trade through documentary collections and letters of credit; marine insurance; and international dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. recognise and understand the nature and purpose of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange and letters of credit
  3. identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods, international finance and marine insurance in a variety of practical situations
  5. write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal implications of the issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTX9190, BTF5919, BTM5919, BTF5910, BTX9100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedBerwick First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kerstin Steiner

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this unit allows a student independently to gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation for the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedBerwick First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kerstin Steiner

Synopsis

This unit discusses the fundamental theoretical premises that can frame legal and regulatory research. It explores ways of formulating research question(s) and hypotheses, and identifies assumptions and theories that are relevant in the development of a conceptual framework for research. The topics discussed will cover principles of legal and social scientific methods, such as relational theory, comparative law, regulatory theory, social constructivism, systems theory and critical legal theory). Stress will be placed on developing argument analysis (e.g. avoiding fallacies in reasoning, evaluating and constructing sound arguments). These discussions will clarify the theoretical and practical underpinnings of research design, inform subsequent analyses of how to select different research methods (qualitative, quantitative, mixed), and illustrate key issues associated with the main arguments development in research work. The unit will also examine ways of presenting a compelling theoretical and practical case for legal and regulatory research. Finally, students will prepare a research proposal and report.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enhance students' awareness of the core theoretical and methodological perspectives that underpin research about law and regulation at the honours level
  2. increase students' understanding of the principles involved in producing sound complex arguments as required in writing an approved research project
  3. consider and evaluate material presented in the research and methodology seminar series
  4. apply theoretical and methodological knowledge in the preparation of a research proposal for a research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course BBus(Hons) (Taxation) to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

BTF4900


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Arup (First semester); Ms Anne O'Rourke (Second semester)

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop knowledge and skills, and an understanding of the relationship between the common law, statute law and awards and agreements. In this regard, the unit introduces students to the central tenets of the contract of employment including the formation of the contract, breach of contract and wrongful dismissal, confidentiality, restrictive covenants, employee/independent contractor issues and discrimination law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a wide range of legal issues affecting the employment relationship, with a particular focus on the contract of employment
  2. illustrate the practical implications of employment law by identifying emerging issues in the media, the workplace and the case law
  3. apply the legal principles from relevant cases to hypothetical scenarios
  4. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (take-home): 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Arup (First semester)
Ms Anne O'Rourke (Second semester)

Prohibitions

BTX9060, BTG9241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Mark Bender

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop an understanding of the legal frameworks regulating marketing activities, including competition law, the regulation of marketing communication, channel strategies and the fundamentals of intellectual property principles.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify, analyse and apply laws designed to protect consumers
  2. identify, analyse and apply intellectual property principles and apply these to the development, marketing and protection of products, knowledge and ideas.
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prohibitions

BTX9150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor John Gillespie

Synopsis

The unit will introduce students to the theories about the globalization of law. Using a series of cases studies it aims to show how global laws are adopted and reinterpreted in key domestic legal systems in Asia. The unit will also demonstrate the local constraints on the globalization of law and offer reasons why legal and regulatory systems in Asian are not necessarily converging with those in the West.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the historical, economic and political context of domestic legal systems in selected Asian countries (China, Indonesia, Malaysia, Japan)
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in the interaction between global regulation and domestic regulation in developing countries in Asia
  3. gain a greater insight into the role of global regulation in the Asia Pacific region;
  4. critically apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of the students choice
  5. develop general legal research and academic skills, and
  6. develop presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 60%
Examination (take home): 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Chenxia Shi

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed study of the theoretical perspectives of business law and regulation in China. Some of the specific topics of the unit include business organizations in China, company law, securities law, fund management law, contract law, copyright law, and bankruptcy law. This unit will provide students with broad policy perspectives on these topics in a nutshell and practical guidance on compliance issues concerning Chinese business law and regulation when doing business in China.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend business culture and underlying principles of business law and regulation in China
  2. develop good understanding of cultural, political and social factors in shaping business regulation in China
  3. acquire knowledge of specific substantive areas of Chinese business law.
  4. critically analyse key issues of Chinese business law and the manner in which law regulates commercial activities in China
  5. evaluate broad policy perspectives on the issues studied, informed by comparative approach in legal analysis
  6. improve student research, writing and presentation skills through an extended opportunity to write and present research assignments in a chosen topic or area by the students.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedMalaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Abdul Majid

Synopsis

This unit analyses current international issues impacting employment law and the challenges faced by businesses with a global workforce. With a comparative focus on Malaysia, these include expatriate employment contracts; restrictive covenants; implementation of global codes of conduct via corporate social responsibility initiatives; reorganization of business and redundancy; outsourcing; performance management and alternative dispute resolution options for workplace issues. Examples from various jurisdictions and international organizations will be used to facilitate an appreciation of the tensions between nation State dynamics and international norms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the role of international norms in employment law
  2. explain expatriate contracts in employment law i.e. contracts of service & independent contractors, restraints of trade and trade secrets
  3. discuss managerial prerogatives of reorganisation and outsourcing
  4. evaluate the consequences of disciplinary action and the role of mediation
  5. discuss the role of corporate social responsibility at the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

BTX9190

Prohibitions

BTG9241, BTX5060 and BTX9060


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Chris ArupProfessor Vince Morabito (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit requires students to formulate a research topic on a business law related area of study and complete an approximately 8,000 word research project. Seminars will be conducted at which students will present progress and final reports on their research projects. The seminars will also include practical research and academic skills sessions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enable students to apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of their choice
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in a business law area
  3. demonstrate legal research and presentation skills and the ability to critically analyse legal issues have been acquired
  4. develop and further build upon general legal research and academic skills
  5. further build upon presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Research project (8,000 words): 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Chris Arup (First semester)
Professor Vince Morabito (Second semester)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that this unit be undertaken in the last semester of study for the Master of Business Law.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Business Law and Taxation
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Carolyn Sutherland

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop knowledge and skills relating to the legal principles which underpin contemporary human resource management issues. It includes consideration of such matters as recruitment and selection, contract of employment issues, performance appraisal, equal opportunity and anti-discrimination, termination of employment, remuneration, rewards and employee benefits, employee health and safety and related HRM issues. The unit takes a practical approach to these matters and focuses specifically on practical case studies and decisions of the Courts and Tribunals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a wide range of legal issues affecting the human resources practitioner
  2. illustrate the practical implications of the law in the area of human resources management by identifying emerging issues in the media, the workplace and the case law
  3. apply the legal principles from relevant cases to hypothetical scenarios involving human resources management issues
  4. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (take-home): 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

BTX9841


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Gary Magee

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to the field of long-run economic growth and performance. Two key questions are addressed: why do certain economies persistently perform more successfully than others, and how is leadership in the global economy achieved and maintained? Students completing this unit will be able to explain and describe the pattern of long-term economic growth, leadership and decline in the world economy since the industrial revolution; evaluate the role of culture, institutions and the environment in economic change; and apply the methods of historical economics to contemporary economic debates.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate critically contrasting views about the determinants of long-run economic change
  2. analyse the processes of long-term economic growth and decline
  3. analyse a variety of different approaches, including the historical and institutional, that can be used to supplement traditional economic analysis and policy making
  4. explain and analyse the main issues and debates in the field of historical economics
  5. explain and describe the main contours of the development of the world economy
  6. better contextualize and analyse contemporary economic events.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Hee-Seung Yang

Synopsis

Topics include consumer preference theory; choice; demand; technology; profit maximisation and duality; competitive general equilibrium in the context of decreasing, increasing and constant returns; two-part tariffs; expected utility; adverse selection; and moral hazard.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. upgrade their analytical skill for intermediate microeconomics
  2. appreciate and have a basic understanding of the key ideas of advanced microeconomic theory
  3. gain first hand experience in the application of microeconomic principles to the analysis of a range of economic issues
  4. gain the microeconomic techniques to undertake successfully other fourth year units and some fifth year units taught by the Department.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECX5465


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Synopsis

Contemporary macroeconomics and recent policy debates, including market clearing and long-run equilibrium; classical dichotomy; money in the global economy; aggregate demand and price rigidity, microfoundations of macroeconomics, disequilibrium models; stock-flow interactions; wealth effects; rational expectations; policy ineffectiveness and Ricardian equivalence; money and credit; exchange rate regimes; new Keynesian macroeconomics; comovements of macro variables and macroeconomic forecasting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be aware of major recent developments in the field of macroeconomics
  2. have a basic understanding of the concepts and techniques of macroeconomic forecasting using an applied general equilibrium (AGE) model
  3. be aware of the major developments in the field of macroeconomics in the last ten years
  4. be familiar with different macroeconomic models used for policy making and their points of emphasis
  5. be able to make judicious policy predictions and undertake independent research studies in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECX5466


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Pushkar Maitra

Synopsis

Characteristics and experience of developing countries; theories of economic growth and development; domestic and external sources of financial and human resources for development; the roles of international trade, investment, technology manufacturing and government in the development process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the distinctive environmental, technical and social characteristics of developing countries
  2. understand the processes of structural change and social change which occur during development
  3. recognise the importance of institutions, technological change, and international trade, aid, and investment for the development process
  4. have skills necessary for the critical appraisal of theories of economic development.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or ECF5927 or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Synopsis

Topics include the gains and costs of trading internationally; static and dynamic welfare effects of protection; the political economy of international trade policy; optimum policies in the presence of market power, uncertainty, and other market imperfections; trade policy instruments; strategies for trade liberalisation including regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse the effects of international trade on real income and its distribution in various market structures
  2. have a sound understanding of the allocation and welfare effects of commercial policies
  3. possess the skills necessary to evaluate critically contemporary innovations in Australia's trade policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 and ECC3690, or ECF5410 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Synopsis

Outline of the Australian and overseas approaches to competition policy; the economic background to the Competition and Consumer Act; market definition issues; evaluation of restrictive trade practices and mergers or alliances; structural reform of industries, access and monopoly regulation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. be able to understand and analyse critically the economic reasons for government intervention to reduce the adverse effects of restrictive trade practices
  2. have an understanding of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (and its predecessor, the Trade Practices Commission)
  3. be able to evaluate recent decisions from the perspectives of an economist, lawyer, policy-maker and business manager.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECC5470, ECX5470, ECF3900, ECX3900


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mike White

Synopsis

Topics include Keynes' aggregate demand and supply analysis and critique of automatic adjustment in the economy; the significance of an endogenous money supply for inflation; credit, speculation and financial instability; the national saving debate; investment and income distribution; the Phillips Curve and hysteresis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the Post Keynesian framework of the economy, which draws on the work of J M Keynes and M Kalecki
  2. have a clear understanding of how the framework can be used to analyse a number of policy issues in Australia, including monetary policy, the roles of investment and saving, government budgetary strategies and income policies
  3. be able to critically analyse the framework through written work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Russell Smyth

Synopsis

The unit applies the method of economics to the analysis of the law itself - to the structure of the common law, legal processes, legal institutions and statutory regulation, and to the impact of law on the behaviour of individuals and groups and the functioning of the economy. Topics include: is there a role for law and economics in studying the law, economics of crime and capital punishment, punitive damages, interest group theories of judicial independence and the determinants of judicial influence and prestige.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the two-way interrelationships between law and economics
  2. evaluate the key role of laws in setting the institutional framework in which economic decisions are taken and to critically evaluate current and proposed laws as determinants of economic performance
  3. critically assess the responses of households and business enterprises to current and alternative laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Forsyth (First semester)
Professor Russell Smyth (Second semester)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 0181, 0024 or 0171 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Synopsis

Theories of hedging and speculation; determination of spot and futures prices, and intertemporal allocation; market efficiency; expectations, including adaptive expectations and rational expectations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have an understanding of how to think about the trade-off between risk and return
  2. have the ability to read literature in financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or ECX5465

Prohibitions

ECC5475, ECX5475


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paulo Santos

Synopsis

Topics include development and application of microeconomic theory for the economic evaluation of (public) sector investment projects and policies; investment analysis and criteria, discounting techniques; Pareto potential improvement criterion, shadow pricing, social discount rates, distribution issues, secondary benefits, risk and uncertainty, cost-effectiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the analytical framework, economic principles and techniques required for the economic evaluation of investment projects, policies and regulations, especially those involving the public sector
  2. appreciate the welfare economic foundations upon which economic evaluation is based
  3. design studies to estimate benefits and costs, in the presence of market distortions (eg controls, taxes and externalities), and for non-marketed goods (for example, time, noise, safety).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC5479, ECX5479


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Synopsis

Models of decision making in the collective setting, utilising a number of tools, some of which will be familiar microeconomic ones. Economic approaches to collective decision environments, including 'new welfare economics', the 'Chicago' and 'Virginia' schools. Whenever possible, Australian policies will be examined in light of theory.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the issues and analysis of collective decisions
  2. become more discriminating observers of the political and policy environment
  3. be able to review market failures and consider the potential for solving these failures in the collective or political setting
  4. be able to examine problems of free-riding, incentives to vote, interest group influence, bureaucratic behaviour and constitutional frameworks
  5. understand the economist's role in the process of formulating public policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)To be advised

Synopsis

A study of theories in welfare economics, including conditions for Pareto optimality, welfare criteria, social choice, consumer surpluses, second versus third best, externalities and public goods as well as problems of applying these theories to such areas as public utility pricing, optimal taxation, road congestion, environmental protection, and public spending.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the welfare economic foundation of public policies
  2. analyse the pros and cons, costs and benefits of economic measures and changes from the perspective of social welfare.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

To be advised


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Synopsis

Theories of the firm, contract, property rights structure, market structure, hierarchy, bargaining, principal-agent relationship, research and development, advertising, and entry, exit, and pricing strategy. The equilibrium implications of the internal organisation of a firm and the organisational structure of the market in relation to strategic interactions between agents, information problems and related incentive mechanisms. Basic game theory and concepts of game equilibrium applied to the analysis of opportunistic behaviour and related transactions costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the modern developments of the theory of industrial organisation
  2. enhance their knowledge of intermediate microeconomics by incorporating information and endogenous transaction costs into analysis
  3. undertake theoretical and empirical research in the field of industrial organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECC5484, ECX5484


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liang Choon Wang

Synopsis

Students select a preferred topic on which to conduct original research after consulting with the coordinator and supervisors. During the year students participate in research workshops, propose the research plan in written and oral form, conduct research, give a final presentation of the research findings, act as a formal discussant on another student research paper, submit their own final research paper, and are expected to engage in discussion of other students' presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain the necessary skills to conduct original research
  2. demonstrate the ability to ask and answer critical questions that have economic and policy significance at a professional standard
  3. communicate research findings in written and oral form in a professional manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Admission to fourth year honours, Graduate Diploma in Economics or preliminary masters in the Departments of Economics, Econometrics or Accounting and Finance


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Jeff Richardson and Ms Jenny Watts

Synopsis

A survey of theoretical issues in the economics of health systems and the major health policy issues confronting Australia. Emphasis is given to theories which differ from economic orthodoxy. Topics include market characteristics; market failure and regulation; equity and issues of social justice; demand analysis and human capital; the production of health and health care; theories of price formation; hospital models and hospital payment; optimal health insurance; and alternatives to Medicare.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a clear understanding of the theoretical debate over the 'special' characteristics of health and the health care and health insurance markets
  2. have a clear understanding of the major theories of the demand for health care
  3. have a clear understanding of the use of economic incentives to achieve allocative and technical efficiency in the production of both health and health care services
  4. be familiar with the social and institutional characteristics of the Australian health care market and the various proposals for its reform.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Anthony Harris

Synopsis

Principles and techniques used in the economic evaluation of health services. Topics include effectiveness, efficiency and economic evaluation; cost benefit analysis; cost effectiveness and cost utility analysis; multi-attribute utility analysis; measuring utility; psychometric measurement theory; ethical issues in resource allocation; decision criteria; time discounting; costing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. techniques applied to the evaluation of health services and programs
  2. theoretical debates over discounting, decision criteria, and the measurement of both costs and the quality of life.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Synopsis

Outline of the Australian and overseas approaches to competition policy; the economic background to the Trade Practices Act; market definition issues; evaluation of restrictive trade practices and mergers or alliances; structural reform of industries, access and monopoly regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to understand and analyse critically the economic reasons for government intervention to reduce the adverse effects of restrictive trade practices
  2. have an understanding of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (and its predecessor, the Trade Practices Commission)
  3. be able to evaluate recent decisions from the perspectives of an economist, lawyer, policy-maker and business manager
  4. be able to research in-depth a current problem area relating to competition policy and practices that requires investigation beyond topics covered in lectures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECC4700, ECX5470, ECF3900, ECX3900


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Synopsis

Theories of hedging and speculation; determination of spot and futures prices, and intertemporal allocation; market efficiency; expectations, including adaptive expectations and rational expectations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the trade-off between risk and return
  2. develop the ability to understand literature in financial economics
  3. understand the concepts of adaptive and rational expectations
  4. develop analytical, written and oral skills by writing and presenting research papers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or ECF5410 or with permission

Prohibitions

ECC4750, ECX5475


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paulo Santos

Synopsis

Topics include development and application of microeconomic theory for the economic evaluation of (public) sector investment projects and policies; investment analysis and criteria, discounting techniques; Pareto potential improvement criterion, shadow pricing, social discount rates, distribution issues, secondary benefits, risk and uncertainty, cost-effectiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the analytical framework, economic principles and techniques required for the economic evaluation of investment projects, policies and regulations, especially those involving the public sector
  2. appreciate the welfare economic foundations upon which economic evaluation is based
  3. design studies to estimate benefits and costs, in the presence of market distortions (e.g. controls, taxes and externalities), and for non-marketed goods (for example, time, noise, safety).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or ECF5410 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4790, ECX5479


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Synopsis

Theories of the firm, contract, property rights structure, market structure, hierarchy, bargaining, principal-agent relationship, research and development, advertising, and entry, exit, and pricing strategy. The equilibrium implications of the internal organisation of a firm and the organisational structure of the market in relation to strategic interactions between agents, information problems and related incentive mechanisms. Basic game theory and concepts of game equilibrium applied to the analysis of opportunistic behaviour and related transactions costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the modern developments of the theory of industrial organisation
  2. enhance knowledge of intermediate microeconomics by incorporating information and endogenous transaction costs into analysis
  3. undertake theoretical and empirical research in the field of industrial organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECC4840, ECX5484


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jeffrey LaFrance

Synopsis

The unit aims to introduce students to the building blocks of microeconomics. It will start with individual choice theory where the focus will be to explain the mathematical structure of the different types of objects of choice that are conceived by economists to model individual behaviour across a variety of contexts. This will be followed by an exhaustive discussion of how and when preferences over a set of objects can be represented using a real-valued utility function. The basic concepts and results in social choice theory, cooperative and non-cooperative game theory, and mechanism design will also be covered. The unit will highlight the important role of axiomatization, optimization, and strategic reasoning in microeconomics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an understanding of the mathematical building blocks of formal microeconomic analysis
  2. be able to express complex economic relationships using formal mathematical exposition
  3. understand the core concepts and results in individual and social choice theory, game theory, and mechanism design.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 or 4427 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit will cover advanced topics in microeconomics and current research and policy issues. Topics may include an in-depth study of general equilibrium, mesoeconomics, new classical economics of specialisation, transaction costs, and inframarginal analysis, principal agent models and incentive regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in microeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Within-semester research paper: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Horag Choi

Synopsis

Underpinnings of modern macroeconomics basic to models of growth and cyclical fluctuations as well as models of monetary and fiscal policies. Topics include neoclassical and endogenous growth theories; overlapping generations models with and without money; policy ineffectiveness issues; equilibrium business cycle as well as traditional Keynesian models of fluctuations; and models of incomplete nominal adjustment such as those of New-Keynesian and the Lucas-Supply variety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop familiarity with the mathematical tools and techniques of modern macroeconomic theory
  2. understand the economics of growth and business cycle fluctuations
  3. appreciate the role of economic policy in the short and long-run
  4. enhance understanding of the basic theoretical approaches employed in specialist fields such as international economics, economic development/growth, dynamics stochastic general equilibrium and financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 or 4427 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Pushkar Maitra

Synopsis

Evaluation of the neoclassical trade model and its extensions; foreign direct investment, capital flows and technology transfer; alternative explanations of comparative advantage including increasing returns and imperfect competition; geography and trade; new growth models; micro- and macroeconomic reform, structural change and factor mobility; institutions, transaction costs and rent seeking; theories of the state; the political economy of liberalisation and stabilisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an understanding of advanced theories in the areas of international and development economics
  2. identify the linkages between the two major areas of open economy analysis
  3. formulate policies on the basis of sound theoretical foundations and, correspondingly, to evaluate policy proposals
  4. acquire the skills necessary to assess critically new theoretical developments in this area.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor John Madden

Synopsis

The unit is a sequel to ECC3650. Students continue to develop essential AGE modelling skills in areas of theory, data, computing and application. Whereas the emphasis in ECC3650 is on comparative static analysis, this subject deals with dynamics, including the specification of capital accumulation and technological change. Forecasting applications of AGE models are emphasised.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have an advanced understanding of all aspects of applied general equilibrium economics
  2. be able to build and to use AGE-models in the preparation for postgraduate research projects
  3. be able to implement AGE-modelling techniques as professional economists.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination: 80%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This graduate seminar unit is compulsory for PhD candidates and Master of Economics candidates in the Department of Economics. It is a non-weighted unit and is taken in addition to any prescribed coursework. Students will be assessed on the basis of attendance, participation and presentation. PhD candidates are required to present two seminars, Master of Economics candidates are expected to present one seminar. Seminar presentations must be made prior to submission of a candidate's research paper or thesis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. extend advanced knowledge of the breadth of economics beyond area of specialisation
  2. develop skills for consolidation and dissemination of research findings
  3. develop oral and presentational skills required for effective presentations of research findings to peer audiences
  4. refine debating skills in professional peer settings.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Synopsis

Topics in the theory of public goods including optimum conditions analysis; market failure and problems of political decision-making in relation to the supply of pure and impure public goods; separation of equity and efficiency aspects; possible applications to such issues as income redistribution, merit wants, pollution control and multi-level government.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the welfare framework, economic concepts and theoretical economic analysis of public goods at an advanced level
  2. be familiar with advanced economic analysis of political decision-making in the public choice literature
  3. have a sophisticated understanding of the implications of public goods analysis for government policy in major areas of public expenditure
  4. have a sophisticated appreciation of the limitations and deficiencies of theoretical and empirical economic analysis in this general area.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 or 4427 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Nick Feltovich

Synopsis

This unit provides students with training in information economics and applied game theory. Discussion of key concepts in game theory; the nature of different kinds of information asymmetries (whether the informed party has private knowledge about certain events, whether he/she can undertake actions unobservable to others); and economic implications. Explore how different incentive mechanisms (signalling by the informed party and screening by the uninformed party) can be used to mitigate the impact of asymmetric information.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the key concepts in game theory, as well as the nature and economic implications of different kinds of information asymmetries
  2. understand how different incentive mechanisms -- for example, signalling by the informed party and screening by the uninformed party may be useful in mitigating the impact of asymmetric information on economic activities
  3. critically evaluate the extent to which a particular application of information economics and game theory succeeds in generating new testable implications regarding the phenomena under study
  4. construct formal models to study the importance of informational problems in explaining phenomena that are of interest to them.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Birendra Rai

Synopsis

This unit will primarily focus on explaining the structure of mathematics used in economics. It will start with an introduction to axiomatic set theory and highlight that almost all mathematical concepts of interest to economists can be thought of assets or subsets of suitably defined sets. The three main mathematical structured sets to be covered will be sets with an order structure, topological structure, and linear structure. The six main topics will be Set Theory, Metric and Topological Spaces, Properties of Functions and Correspondences, Linear and Normed Linear Spaces, Fixed Point and Separating Hyperplane Theorems, and a brief introduction to Static and Dynamic Optimization.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic structure of mathematics that is used by economists
  2. gain an in-depth knowledge of Order Structure, Topological Structure, and Linear Structure
  3. master the notion of functions and correspondences along with their key properties
  4. understand fixed point theorems, separating hyperplane theorems, and the different types of static and dynamic optimisation problems
  5. develop the ability to read technical articles on one's own.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liang Choon Wang

Synopsis

Research topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the co-ordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed, but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based on their own research area. A department staff member will be appointed as the supervisor to facilitate and monitor the progress of the research project. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the capability to critically evaluate economic literature and initiate a research topic for further development
  2. conduct, under the mentoring of a supervisor, innovative works to appropriately address the research topic
  3. gain experience in analysing and discussing research outcomes in a seminar context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: research paper 80%
presentation 20%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Johnston

Synopsis

The achievement of efficiency in the health sector. Alternative approaches to allocative efficiency, recent developments in the management of the market, and efficiency in hospitals. Aspects of evaluation techniques including recent developments in quality of life measurement, statistical issues, and modelling techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. undertake sound research in health economics
  2. have knowledge of the major issues in health economics and the capacity to judge the importance of these issues
  3. function as independent professional health economist.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Klaus Abbink (First semester); Associate Professor Elias Khalil (Second semester)

Synopsis

The behaviour of the economy is the result of a host of decisions made each day by millions of people. Prices and markets play a crucial role in economic behaviour, creating a system in which actions of individuals, guided by self-interest and without any central co-ordination or planning, create wealth for society as a whole. How individual workers, households and firms make decisions, and how they interact with each other, is the subject of microeconomics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how markets work, and how prices work to allocate resources
  2. understand the basic principles of how people make economic decisions, how they interact economically, and how the economy as a whole works
  3. understand the role of public policy, and the constraints on its operation, when markets fail
  4. understand how firms are organised and make decisions
  5. have developed learning skills and begun to acquire the techniques of thinking like an economist
  6. have sufficient grounding to attempt advanced studies in microeconomics in subsequent years.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Klaus Abbink (First semester)
Associate Professor Elias Khalil (Second semester)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECC2000, ETC2000, ECX9000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Siew-Ling Yew (Semester 1); Dr Michael White (Semester 2)

Synopsis

This unit focuses on macroeconomic theory and policy; managing aggregate demand; economic growth and fluctuations. Content covers the following topics in detail:

  • open-economy IS-LM framework and AD-AS framework
  • principles of monetary and fiscal policy and problems of implementation
  • alternative theories of aggregate supply; imperfect information; labour market rigidities
  • explaining and correcting inflation and unemployment.

This unit provides an intermediate level treatment of macroeconomic theory and policy. Its central focus is the analysis of the factors and processes that determine the macroeconomic performance of a nation as reflected in such indicators as aggregate output, employment, the price level and exchange rate, and the balance of payments.

Implications of this analysis for the formulation of national economic policy are explored with particular application to Australia.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. analyse systematically the forces that determine change in macroeconomic performance and living standards in Australia
  2. understand the relationship between the domestic economy and the international economic environment as reflected in the behaviour of the balance of payments and exchange rates
  3. evaluate critically the issues underlying important contemporary policy debates in Australia and elsewhere
  4. understand the nature and relevance of some significant recent developments in macroeconomics
  5. practice rigorous economic analysis and put that to constructive use in decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siew Ling Yew (First semester)
Dr Michael White (Second semester)

Prohibitions

ECC2010, ETC2010, ECC9010, ECX9010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Synopsis

Issues include incentives and credibility problems in microeconomic policy making in both developed and developing economies, with particular attention to topics such as microeconomic issues in the public sector, the role of institutions, and the critical evaluation of microeconomic policy. Students are expected to build on basic microeconomics knowledge and to exhibit an understanding of the policy context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply economic theory and institutional knowledge of relevant parts of the economy to analyse government microeconomic policy options, and to make recommendations on policy actions
  2. understand developments in policy debates in other countries and consider their impact on recent economic policies implemented in Australia
  3. evaluate the contributions and limitations of economic analysis for helping to understand and to evaluate microeconomic policy options.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECC2000 or ECC5900 or ECX9000 or ECX5900 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC2400 and ECX9400


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Agne Suziedelyte

Synopsis

This unit provides an understanding of the microeconomic approach to resource allocation, both in general and specifically, in relation to the health sector. It introduces students to the use of economic tools in the analysis of the 'market' for health care, in terms of efficiency and equity. It also provides an analytical framework for assessment of the Australian health care system, and health policy generally, from an economic perspective.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand basic microeconomic concepts and their application to the health sector
  2. understand role, limitations and usefulness of economic analysis and economics as a way of thinking, particularly when applied to the health care sector
  3. understand organisation and delivery of health services from an economic perspective
  4. understand the Australian Health Care system from an economic perspective, including an analysis of the reasons for growth in expenditure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECX9700


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Silva Zavarsek

Synopsis

The economics of the pharmaceutical industry including the market for pharmaceuticals and its regulation internationally and in Australia. Principles of economic evaluation of the costs and outcomes of pharmaceutical products, and provides a guide to best practice with particular emphasis on clinical trials and protocol design.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. economic analysis in the pharmaceutical industry
  2. structure of the pharmaceutical industry and the inter-relationship between the nature of the product, market structure and government regulation
  3. impact of government intervention in the pharmaceutical industry including alternative regulatory regimes
  4. role of economic evaluation in promoting the efficient use of drugs
  5. economic analysis of drugs alongside clinical trials, including techniques of health outcome measurement.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECX9710


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Duncan Mortimer

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to techniques of microeconomic appraisal in the evaluation of health care programs. It considers conceptual and methodological issues, as well as the practical conduct, and review, of such studies and their use in priority setting within the health care sector. The application of decision rules for economic efficiency in health program evaluation and their influence on policy decisions are introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand techniques used for microeconomic appraisal in the evaluation of health care programs
  2. understand conceptual and methodological issues arising in the economic appraisal of health care programs
  3. understand conduct and review of economic evaluation in the health care sector
  4. understand application of results from economic evaluation to achieving broader priority setting goals within the health care sector.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECX9730


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yuanyuan Gu

Synopsis

This unit synthesizes contemporary issues in health policy, building on the fundamental economic concepts, including economic efficiency and equity, learned in the first level introductory unit. It is aimed at further developing the core concepts of efficiency and equity, and the application of contemporary health care issues. The unit is organised around three themes: the role of government in the health care system; government regulation in the organisation and delivery of health care services and incentives for equity and efficiency; and the use of economic principles to analyse and develop policy options in health care.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the changing perceptions of the role of government in the health sector
  2. understand the organisation, delivery and financing of health services, including incentives for equity and efficiency
  3. understand the implications of the ageing population on health care expenditure in Australia, including the organisation, delivery and funding of aged care services
  4. understand the impact of government regulation on prices and subsidies in the pharmaceutical, health technology and in private health insurance industries
  5. understand the options for health system reform, including the analysis of policy options, resource allocation and priority setting models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECX9700 or ECC5970 or have permission from the unit coordinator.

Prohibitions

ECX9741


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paula Lorgelly

Synopsis

The unit provides an overview of the particular problems confronted by health care systems in developing countries. Economic principles are used to review and develop policy options for financing of the health sector and approaches to priority setting that foster improved expenditure allocation. Practical aspects of individual health care project appraisal in developing countries are also addressed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the determinants of health, international differences in the pattern of disease, and the link between health and development
  2. appreciate the economic principles that should underpin health care financing and expenditure decisions
  3. possess a sound knowledge of alternative health system structures in developing countries, the policy constraints typically faced by developing countries in managing health care systems
  4. use economic principles to critically appraise policy alternatives for health sector reform and understand practical methodologies for the application of economic principles particularly when data availability is extremely limited
  5. review the practical application of methodologies for health care program evaluation in developing countries.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECX9750


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedMonash Online Teaching Period 3 2015 (Online)

Synopsis

This unit provides an understanding of the microeconomic approach to resource allocation, both in general and specifically, in relation to the health sector. It introduces students to the use of economic tools in the analysis of the 'market' for health care, in terms of efficiency and equity. It also provides an analytical framework for assessment of the Australian health care system, and health policy generally, from an economic perspective.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand basic microeconomic concepts and their application to the health sector
  2. understand role, limitations and usefulness of economic analysis and economics as a way of thinking, particularly when applied to the health care sector
  3. understand organisation and delivery of health services from an economic perspective
  4. understand the Australian Health Care system from an economic perspective, including an analysis of the reasons for growth in expenditure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course version {4528}

Prohibitions

ECX9700, ECC5970


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Birendra Rai

Synopsis

Advanced topics in microeconomics and current research and policy issues. Topics may include an in-depth study of general equilibrium, mesoeconomics, new classical economics of specialisation, transaction costs, and inframarginal analysis, principal agent models and incentive regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in microeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%

Option 2: Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level course work which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Siew-Ling Yew

Synopsis

Advanced topics in macroeconomics, current research and policy issues. The topics may include an in-depth study of consumption, investment, inflation and monetary policy, unemployment, and empirical applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in macroeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level coursework which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 0029 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Pushkar Maitra

Synopsis

A research forum for the exploration of new directions in research and advanced specialist topics in open economy analysis. Students will be introduced to the forefront of contemporary analytical developments that are relevant for policy formation. The scope of the subject encompasses the pure theory of international trade, open economy macroeconomics and international finance, and development economics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess first-hand knowledge of the contemporary research agenda in the economics of the open economy
  2. be conversant with the evolving research literature that is represented in working papers and formal publications of leading researchers at home and abroad
  3. possess the qualifications to undertake technically advanced research assignments that are of contemporary analytical and policy relevance
  4. gain practical experience in, and understanding of PhD level research work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 0029 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Asadul Islam

Synopsis

Senior positions in government and corporations expect professionals to have a high level of research competence. This subject is designed to impart this skill by requiring students to select a project in their area of specialisation and submit a 9000 word report and an oral presentation. Students will work closely with a personal supervisor to ensure that the research paper locates and masters new knowledge and demonstrates originality in both research content and intellectual argument.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. consolidate knowledge of issues specific to the respective areas of specialisation
  2. develop analytical and diagnostic skills and enhance the ability to analyse and resolve problems of practical importance
  3. broaden the experience with research methods applied to practical problems and demonstrate a capacity for original work, both in terms of locating new knowledge and its application
  4. acquire skills in the written presentation of applied research work
  5. hone oral skills and acquire experience in demonstrating the capacity in research and exposition in seminars attended by senior practitioners from the private and corporate sectors.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3842 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mita Bhattacharya

Synopsis

The unit develops and examines the theoretical and empirical relationships between the structure of industries, the behaviour of enterprises and market performance. The fundamental principles are applied to the advanced analysis of various forms of firms' interaction: entry deterrence, collusion, product differentiation, advertising, RandD, price discrimination, vertical integration. Welfare and policy issues will be discussed with the help of applied theory and empirical approach. In this respect recent journal articles will be used to analyse the concepts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to promote students understanding of the industry in which firms compete
  2. to understand strategic concepts and the use of such concepts with regard to economics, management, and organisational behaviour thereby developing an economic framework or way of thinking
  3. to understand the question 'how do we define the firm?', and the relationship of the definition of the firm to the 'make or buy' problem
  4. to establish an understanding of the dynamics of entry and exit in the marketplace by looking at strategies that incumbents employ to prevent entry or quicken exit by competitors
  5. to develop a competitive advantage framework for characterising and analysing a firm's strategic position within the market.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 55%
Examination: 45%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECF4100 or ECC4650 or equivalent and ECF4200 or ECC4660 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Chongwoo Choe

Synopsis

Game theoretic analysis is fundamental to understanding modern business strategies and forms the basic infrastructure of strategy courses. The unit teaches the basic tools of Game Theory, and introduces a structured way to think about business interactions. Game theory originated in the middle of the twentieth century as the general study of strategic interactions and has found applications in a wide variety of contexts including economics, psychology, politics and evolutionary biology. It is this generality that is the source of its power. Accordingly, the unit develops game theory broadly with applications to strategic situations, including business as well as more general contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to develop a broad understanding of the basic principles of strategic analysis including solution concepts
  2. to apply the abstract theory to concrete problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent, or ECF5927


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Synopsis

This unit will draw on different fields of applied economics such as applied general equilibrium economics, monetary economics, international economics, labour economics, public finance, and international trade and finance. The studies in these areas will be drawn together by research workshops where students present research papers in their chosen topic.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop appreciation of major economic dimensions of the environment in which business operates such as public sector and policy, regulatory frameworks, international linkages
  2. have a solid grounding in specific applications of economic analysis
  3. develop the ability to integrate the use of economic analysis of different settings
  4. develop analytical and writing skills in preparing research papers
  5. develop oral communication skills and gain experience in presenting economic analysis to non-specialist audiences.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or admission to course 3842 or with approval from the Course Director.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wenli Cheng

Synopsis

This unit applies microeconomic principles to study how businesses make decisions to achieve their goals. In particular, it analyses how businesses position themselves in the market and how they form their output and price decisions on the basis of their understanding of demand and supply conditions, market competition and business risks. Finally this unit looks at particular aspects of market failure and the role of government in relation to market failure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate that microeconomic theory can be usefully applied in many facets of modern business decision making
  2. understand the economic logic behind basic decision rules about output and prices
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of the neoclassical microeconomic theory
  4. think independently and communicate effectively.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECF4100 and ECX5410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Synopsis

The focus is on practical questions about how to achieve national economic growth and control inflation in the context of a global economy, with special attention to policy formulation and implementation and the dilemmas facing decision-makers in the government and private sectors. Macroeconomic forecasting and the methods for analysing the short-term and long-term trends are also considered. Australia's experience during the last two decades, in particular the impact of the Asian Currency Crisis, are examined closely.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify current major macroeconomic issues
  2. understand and examine government macroeconomic policy options
  3. evaluate the impact of government policy on business decision marking
  4. evaluate the effects of events like the Asian financial crisis on the domestic economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECF4200, ECX5420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rebecca Valenzuela (Semester 1); Dr Mita Bhattacharya (Semester 2)

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic economic principles and concepts and discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation; the role of institutions in promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, incorporating notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns: does trade make the poor even poorer; are trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; do larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries?

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the Australian economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rebecca Valenzuela (First semester)
Dr Mita Bhattacharya (Second semester)

Prohibitions

ECF9210, ECM5921, ECS5921, ECX5921, ECX9210


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Horag Choi

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes: the importance of international finance; the balance of payments accounts; the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance; foreign exchange markets - spot, forward, futures and options markets; the determination of exchange rates; parity conditions; hedging and speculation in foreign exchange markets; foreign investment; trade barriers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theory and evaluate the impacts of the balance of payments among nations and macroeconomic policies
  2. understand the operation of foreign exchange markets and assess the policy implications of alternative exchange regimes
  3. understand the impacts of multinational corporations in international trade
  4. understand trade barriers and their impacts on national welfare: tariffs and nontariff trade barriers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3842 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sephorah Mangin

Synopsis

This unit examines the scope for policy to improve macroeconomic performance. It will cover: the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic activities; the implementation and operation of monetary policy; the relationship of exchange rates to monetary policy; major factors determining movements in interest rates and exchange rates in both the intermediate and long terms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical and practical importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  2. understand the importance of and the differences between monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies
  3. be able to critically assess macroeconomic policy
  4. understand the implementation and operation of monetary policy and critically assess its impact on the national economy
  5. be familiar with economic factors which are of a major interest to stakeholders in the banking and finance industries.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3842 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Raschky

Synopsis

Students will develop sound knowledge of the differing views of the firm and industry. Topics include: the firm within a capitalist economic system; the macroeconomic constraints on the firm; the market structural constraints on the firm; differing perspectives of the firm - the conventional economic, technological view, the accounting, management and marketing views, the recent transaction costs and new classical view; how these different areas explain current issues such as downsizing and electronic commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and recognise the various processes involved in investment decision making
  2. understand and explain the relevant factors behind risk analysis and risk management
  3. understand and analyse firm pricing strategies
  4. recognise and critically evaluate theories of the organisation known as the firm and the role of managers in such an organisation; and develop an understanding of strategic games in the context of business applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3842 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wenli Cheng (First semester); Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (Second semester)

Synopsis

Microeconomics: scarcity; economic choice; economic systems; economic ideology; demand and supply analysis; consumer behaviour and elasticity; costs of production and profit maximisation; perfect competition and monopoly. Macroeconomics: aggregate demand and aggregate supply; Keynesian versus Neoclassical approaches; the money market and monetary policy; the government budget deficit and fiscal policy; the foreign exchange market and exchange rate policy; unemployment and inflation; the current and capital accounts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a basic understanding of the methodology and principles of economics
  2. have a basic understanding of micro and macro economics
  3. present arguments and make decisions in the economic environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wenli Cheng (First semester)
Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (Second semester)

Prohibitions

ECG9101, ECG5901, ECF9530


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Gamini Herath

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic micro and macroeconomic principles and concepts. It discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation with application to Malaysia and other Asian countries; attempts of Asian institutions at promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations with respect to Asia; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns: does trade make the poor in Asia even poorer; are trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; do larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries and if so why?

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the Australian economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECF9210, ECF5921, ECS5921, ECX9210


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Term 3 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kwame Osei-Assibey

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic micro and macroeconomic principles and concepts. It discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation with application to South Africa and the African continent; the role of institutions in promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, incorporating notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence with respect to Africa which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns whether trade make the poor even poorer; whether trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; and whether larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries; as well as regional integration in Africa.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the South African and other African economies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ECF9210, ECF5921, ECM5921, ECW5921, ECX9210


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Peter Forsyth and Professor Russell Smyth

Synopsis

The unit applies the method of economics to the analysis of the law itself - to the structure of the common law, legal processes, legal institutions and statutory regulation, and to the impact of law on the behaviour of individuals and groups and the functioning of the economy. Topics include: is there a role for law and economics in studying the law, economics of crime and capital punishment, punitive damages, interest group theories of judicial independence and the determinants of judicial influence and prestige.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the two-way interrelationships between law and economics
  2. evaluate the key role of laws in setting the institutional framework in which economic decisions are taken and to critically evaluate current and proposed laws as determinants of economic performance
  3. critically assess the responses of households and business enterprises to current and alternative laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Liang Choon Wang

Synopsis

Students select a preferred topic on which to conduct original research after consulting with the coordinator and supervisors. During the year, students participate in research workshops, propose the research plan in written and oral form, conduct research, give a final presentation of the research findings, act as a formal discussant on another student research paper, submit their own final research paper, and are expected to engage in discussion of other students' presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain the necessary skills to conduct original research
  2. demonstrate the ability to ask and answer critical questions that have economic and policy significance at a professional standard
  3. communicate research findings in written and oral form in a professional manner.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Admission to Master of Business Economics

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Rebecca Valenzuela (Semester 1); Dr Mita Bhattacharya (Semester 2)

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic economic principles and concepts and discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation; the role of institutions in promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, incorporating notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns: does trade make the poor even poorer; are trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; do larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries?

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the Australian economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rebecca Valenzuela (Semester 1)
Dr Mita Bhattacharya (Semester 2)

Prohibitions

ECX9210


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Brett Inder

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students have completed at least three third year econometrics units.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mike Callan

Synopsis

Unit ETC4110 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIA The Actuarial Control Cycle. The student is introduced to the concept of the Actuarial Control Cycle and how it can be applied in practical commercial situations in a wide range of insurance and related applications. This covers life insurance, general insurance, health insurance, pension or superannuation funds and investment issues. The unit also develops the student's understanding of a wide range of commercial background matters in insurance, pensions and investment - covering features of financial products, the related business environment in Australia, and Government policies affecting insurance and related industries. Risk management is introduced both in terms of the risk issues involved in offering insurance and related financial products, and the general concepts of Enterprise Risk Management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and apply an actuarial control cycle in a variety of practical commercial situations
  2. apply the tests of professionalism
  3. examine the need for and impact of regulation and government policy on medium and long term commercial decisions
  4. analyse the main features and risks of financial products and contracts, from the point of view of consumers and providers
  5. demonstrate an understanding of enterprise risk management and its role in organisational management
  6. apply a risk assessment framework to identify and assess the risks in a range of commercial situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Enrolment in this unit is not available via WES. Head of Department approval is required prior to enrolment.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Mike Callan

Synopsis

Unit ETC4130 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIB Investment and Asset Modelling. The unit gives an introduction into the investment background for Australian financial institutions, especially those offering insurance and related financial products. It then addresses issues in asset liability management. The student is introduced to the characteristics and behaviour of various investment types and the understanding of the relationship between risk and return. Valuation methods for investment types are addressed. Economic and financial theories relevant to investment are studied. The techniques of setting investment objectives for different investment funds are covered. More detailed issues in relation to asset liability management are then addressed, including how investment policy for assets may assist in managing liabilities for financial institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to describe and critically discuss the characteristics and behaviour of different Investment types under different economic conditions, understanding the relationship between risk and return and recognising risk factors which includes issuer default, counterparty failure, systemic liquidity, the collapse of speculative bubbles, shocks to the economic system and cyclical/structural changes
  2. develop an understanding of the methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt, equity, property and derivative securities. In particular students should be aware of the valuation methods and principles, data requirements and sources and the implicit assumptions and limitations of these models
  3. develop an understanding of the application and limitations of the major economic and financial theories relevant to investment, and be able to critically evaluate these theories including the efficient market hypothesis, the capital asset pricing model, multi-factor pricing models and theories from behavioural finance
  4. define appropriate investment objectives based on the liability profile of a fund
  5. specify appropriate investment constraints, based on the liability profile of a fund
  6. identify the characteristics of different types of asset models
  7. critically evaluate the appropriateness of an asset model for a given context
  8. derive consistent asset assumptions for asset models, taking into account historical data, prevailing industry expectations, contemporary investment literature, and other practical considerations such as tax
  9. apply asset assumptions, and the linkages contained within asset models, to real world situations
  10. describe and critically evaluate different approaches to asset allocation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Enrolment in this unit is not available via WES. Head of Department approval is required prior to enrolment.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Heather Anderson, Professor Keith McLaren

Synopsis

This unit consists of two components relating to the theory underlying, and the implementation of, empirical work in econometrics. The first topic covers the specification and estimation of systems of consumer demand equations and producer demand and supply equations, extensions of these methods to other areas, and some practical applications. The second topic covers growth regressions, trend/cycle decompositions, structural breaks, structural vector autoregressions and error correction models and macroeconomic panels, together with some practical applications. On completion of this unit students should be familiar with recent developments in these fields and have developed the skills to undertake empirical work. Further, students should be able to critically evaluate empirical work and related policy analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. specify the structure of consumer demand systems
  2. use duality theory to generalise these specifications
  3. understand the use of appropriate specific estimation techniques
  4. extend these ideas to producer demand and supply models
  5. consider a number of empirical applications, and derive policy implications
  6. become competent in handling demand and production data using econometric software
  7. specify, estimate and interpret growth regressions
  8. understand the modelling of trends, cycles and structural breaks
  9. specify, estimate and interpret structural vector autoregressions and error correction models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit ETC3400, ETC3410 , ETF3200, ETC3450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Xueyan Zhao

Synopsis

This unit covers specification, estimation and evaluation of a range of statistical models used to analyse (predominantly) micro data in economics, finance and marketing. These include models of discrete data on individual choice behaviour, censored and truncated data. A hands-on approach is taken, such that the models are illustrated with real-life applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. know in which situations the linear regression model is not an appropriate way to model the behaviour of interest
  2. apply a range of alternative models in situations when the linear regression model is not appropriate
  3. model data as recorded in either surveys or panels
  4. use appropriate models to predict the probability that an individual will choose a particular: labour market state; mode of transport; consumption level of alcohol; number of cigarettes to smoke per week; and so on.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit. ETC3400, ETC3410 or ETF3200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor John Madden

Synopsis

This unit covers the theoretical structure and application of computable general equilibrium (CGE) models. Topics include:

  • the derivation of the model's non-linear equation system
  • evaluation of coefficients and parameters, model closure, specification of economic shocks, solution techniques and interpretation of results.

During hands-on computing sessions, students will undertake simulations of a series of economic policy questions and analyse results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin and Dr Bonsoo Koo

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a range of advanced, current techniques used in analysing financial data. Topics covered include the analysis of the time series and distributional features of financial data; the use of stochastic volatility and realised volatility models to capture time-varying volatility, including long memory in volatility; the use of econometric methods to estimate Value at Risk; the modelling of transactions data using trade duration models and transaction-based volatility models; continuous time processes and the application of econometric techniques to option pricing; and the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate alternative methods of modelling asset return volatility
  2. explain the role of volatility modelling in the measurement of risk and in the pricing of financial derivatives
  3. describe the role of continuous time stochastic processes in the pricing of financial derivatives
  4. evaluate econometric models for high frequency data
  5. evaluate the use of generalized method of moments in financial models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ETC3460 and at least one of: ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450 or obtain permission before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin, Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to both foundational and methodological aspects of Bayesian econometrics. Topics covered include a review of the philosophical and probabilistic foundations of Bayesian inference; the contrast between the Bayesian and frequentist (or classical) statistical paradigms; the use of prior information via the specification of objective, Jeffreys and subjective prior distributions; Bayesian linear regression; the use of simulation techniques in Bayesian inference, including Markov chain Monte Carlo algorithms; Bayesian analysis of Gaussian and non-Gaussian time series econometric models, including state space models; and the Kalman filter as a Bayesian updating rule.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the importance of Bayesian statistical techniques in econometric research and understand the differences between the Bayesian and frequentist statistical paradigms
  2. acquire the skills necessary to derive Bayesian results analytically, in simple models
  3. demonstrate an understanding of simulation methods and be able to implement these methods in empirically realistic econometric models
  4. understand the Kalman filter and its role in Bayesian inference in linear time series models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC3400 or equivalent

Prohibitions


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Xueyan Zhao

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based in their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the skills to present an area of research in the discipline of econometrics or statistics in a non-technical manner, both written and oral
  2. grow in ability to ask and address critical questions about research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment : 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Farshid Vahid

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate. Students interested in a reading subject of this type should first consult the head of department.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Enrolment is only by permission of the Unit Coordinator


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Farshid Vahid

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Farshid Vahid

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Enrolment is only by permission of the Unit Coordinator


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Synopsis

An introduction to probability and statistical inference for use in economics and business. Topics covered include random variables, moments and cumulants generating function, discrete and continuous distributions, independence, jointly distributed random variables, conditional random variables, the central limit theorem, sampling distribution, properties of estimators, confidence intervals, tests of hypotheses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand concepts of probability, statistical inference, generating functions and cumulants
  2. derive and use generating functions to evaluate moments and establish the distribution of linear combinations of independent random variables
  3. understand and apply the main methods of estimation and the main properties of estimators
  4. construct confidence intervals for unknown parameters and test hypotheses
  5. develop written, presentational and group work skills through a series of assessed essays, assignments and tutorial work
  6. describe the use of methods learnt during the course of this unit in business and economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin

Synopsis

This unit provides a formal treatment of the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis, with particular focus given to likelihood-based inference. Topics covered include the likelihood principle and maximum likelihood estimation; minimum variance unbiased estimation; maximum likelihood asymptotic distribution theory; likelihood-based hypothesis testing; and quasi-maximum likelihood inference. The theoretical developments are supplemented by numerical results produced using computer simulation. Consideration is also given to the numerical optimisation techniques used to implement likelihood-based procedures in practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. consolidate the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis
  2. understand and implement the technique of maximum likelihood estimation and develop an appreciation of the associated asymptotic distribution theory
  3. understand and implement likelihood-based hypothesis testing and quasi-maximum likelihood inference
  4. develop the skills needed to demonstrate and explore theoretical sampling properties using computer simulation
  5. critically analyse the application of principles underlying econometric analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC2410 or ETC3440 or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Stapleton

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  3. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  4. conduct statistical inference on data that has both a time series and a cross section dimension
  5. interpret the results of econometric analysis of data in context
  6. describe the role of econometrics as it applies to the analysis of data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Either ETC2410 or ETC3440 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3410, ETC4341, ETW3410, ECC3410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mike Callan

Synopsis

To provide a further grounding in mathematical and statistical techniques of particular relevance to insurance and financial work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concepts of decision theory and apply them
  2. calculate probabilities and moments of loss distributions both with and without limits and risk-sharing arrangements
  3. construct risk models involving frequency and severity distributions and calculate the moment generating function and the moments for the risk models both with and without simple reinsurance arrangements
  4. explain the concept of ruin for a risk model
  5. explain the fundamental concepts of Bayesian statistics and use these concepts to calculate Bayesian estimators
  6. describe the fundamental concepts of risk rating and apply them to simple experience rating systems
  7. describe and apply techniques for analysing a delay (or run-off) triangle and projecting the ultimate position
  8. explain the fundamental concepts of a generalised linear model (GLM), and describe how a GLM may apply
  9. define and apply the main concepts underlying the analysis of time series models
  10. explain the concepts of 'Monte Carlo' simulation using a series of pseudo-random numbers.
  11. critically analyse the use of risk models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC2520 or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Stapleton

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to modern time series methods. The topics covered include a review of stationary, univariate ARMA models, stochastic and deterministic trends, testing for unit roots, vector auto regressions, multivariate cointegration and error correction models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. model and forecast stationary autoregressive and moving average time series
  2. test for unit roots in univariate time series
  3. analyse the relationships between multiple, stationary time series
  4. test for, estimate and interpret the long run relationships between non-stationary time series
  5. describe the use of methods learnt during the course of this unit in business and economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC2410 or ETC3440 or equivalent before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Heather Anderson

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models, including the capital asset pricing model and extensions; the statistical characteristics of financial data emphasising skewness, kurtosis and volatility aspects; volatility models such as ARCH models of financial time series, with applications to stock prices, derivatives, and exchange rates including the forecast performance of these models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the time series and distributional features of financial data
  2. explain appropriate specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models
  3. evaluate the need for volatility models for financial returns
  4. describe the specification and estimation of conditional volatility models
  5. critically analyse the use of time series in pricing of financial products.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission to undertake this unit to ensure an appropriate background in Finance and Econometrics.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Fima Klebaner and Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

Mathematical definition of options and other financial derivatives; probability models; mathematical models of random processes; applications; numerical methods; Monte Carlo methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the modern approach to evaluation of uncertain future payoffs
  2. develop an understanding of the concepts of arbitrage and fair games and their relevance to finance and insurance
  3. develop an understanding of the concepts of conditional expectation and martingales and their relation to pricing of financial derivatives
  4. develop an understanding of the random processes such as Random Walk, Brownian Motion and Diffusions and be able to apply them for modelling real life processes and risk models
  5. obtain skills to use Ito's formula
  6. develop the skills to price options by using the Binomial and Black-Scholes models
  7. ability to simulate the price process and obtain prices by simulation
  8. ability to formulate discrete time Risk Model in Insurance and use it for control of probabilities of ruin.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC2520 or ETC2440 or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Colin O'Hare

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the modelling and valuation of cash flows dependent on death, survival, or other uncertain risks.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop further actuarial mathematics and techniques developed in ETC2430 in relation to simple assurance and annuity contracts allowing for multiple decrement situations, and those involving competing risks. Practical issues arising in the actuarial management of life insurance and superannuation are addressed
  2. calculate, using ultimate or select mortality, net premiums and net premium reserves for increasing and decreasing benefits and annuities
  3. develop techniques for the valuation of annuity and assurance products involving two lives, and the use of actuarial functions in that situation
  4. develop methods which can be used to model cash flows contingent upon competing risks
  5. develop the technique of discounted emerging costs as used in profit tests, pricing assessments and reserving calculations for various insurance and pension products
  6. address practical issues such as guarantees and options, risk classification and the effects of the pricing and reserving basis on the emergence of profit
  7. describe the use of multi decrement models in the valuation of actuarial liabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC2430 or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Farshid Vahid

Synopsis

This unit will cover specialised topics from current research areas of staff members with the aim of exposing students to the level of technical detail required for econometric research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine methodological developments at the forefront of econometric research
  2. explain the importance of probabilistic and statistical techniques in econometric research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC4400 or ETC4410 or permission


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin & Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to both foundational and methodological aspects of Bayesian econometrics. Topics covered include a review of the philosophical and probabilistic foundations of Bayesian inference; the contrast between the Bayesian and frequentist (or classical) statistical paradigms; the use of prior information via the specification of subjective, Jeffreys and conjugate prior distributions; Bayesian linear regression; the use of simulation techniques in Bayesian inference, including Markov chain Monte Carlo algorithms; Bayesian analysis of Gaussian and non-Gaussian time series econometric models, including state space models; and the Kalman filter as a Bayesian updating rule.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the importance of Bayesian statistical techniques in econometric research and understand the differences between the Bayesian and frequentist statistical paradigms
  2. acquire the skills necessary to derive Bayesian results analytically, in simple models
  3. demonstrate an understanding of simulation methods and be able to implement these methods in empirically realistic econometric models
  4. understand the Kalman filter and its role in Bayesian inference in linear time series models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC3400, ETC5340 or equivalent.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Xueyan Zhao

Synopsis

This unit covers specification, estimation and evaluation of a range of statistical models used to analyse (predominantly) micro data in economics, finance and marketing. These include models of discrete data on individual choice behaviour, censored and truncated data and panel data. A hands-on approach is taken, such that the models are illustrated with real-life applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. know in which situations the linear regression model is not an appropriate way to model the behaviour of interest
  2. apply a range of alternative models in situations when the linear regression model is not appropriate
  3. model data as recorded in either surveys or panels
  4. use appropriate models to predict the probability that an individual will choose a particular: labour market state; mode of transport; consumption level of alcohol; number of cigarettes to smoke per week; and so on.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit. ETC3400, ETC3410 , ETC5340 or ETF3200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalised Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Heather Anderson

Synopsis

This unit consists of two components relating to the theory underlying, and the implementation of, empirical work in econometrics. The first topic covers the specification and estimation of systems of consumer demand equations and producer demand and supply equations, extensions of these methods to other areas, and some practical applications. The second topic covers growth regressions, trend/cycle decompositions, structural breaks, structural vector autoregressions and error correction models and macroeconomic panels, together with some practical applications. On completion of this unit students should be familiar with recent developments in these fields and have developed the skills to undertake empirical work. Further, students should be able to critically evaluate empirical work and related policy analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. specify the structure of consumer demand systems
  2. use duality theory to generalise these specifications
  3. understand the use of appropriate specific estimation techniques
  4. extend these ideas to producer demand and supply models
  5. consider a number of empirical applications, and derive policy implications
  6. become competent in handling demand and production data using econometric software
  7. familiarity with recent developments in macroeconomic analysis and have developed skills to undertake applied macroeconomic analysis
  8. critically analyse the use of econometrics to analyse data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: ETC3400, ETC5340, ETC3410, ETC5341, ETC3450, ETC5345, ETF3200, ETF5320.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor John Madden

Synopsis

This course surveys contemporary macroeconometric and applied general equilibrium models as they are used for policy analysis. The focus of these models extends from fiscal, monetary and tax policy, through trade, tariffs and industry policy, to the environment and greenhouse gases. In their major written assignment, all students are expected to come to grips with some of the practical issues involved in policy modelling.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin and Dr Bonsoo Koo

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a range of advanced, current techniques used in analysing financial data. Topics covered include the analysis of the time series and distributional features of financial data; the use of stochastic volatility and realised volatility models to capture time-varying volatility, including long memory in volatility; the use of econometric methods to estimate Value at Risk; the modelling of transactions data using trade duration models and transaction-based volatility models; continuous time processes and the application of econometric techniques to option pricing; and the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate alternative methods of modelling asset return volatility
  2. explain the role of volatility modelling in the measurement of risk and in the pricing of financial derivatives
  3. describe the role of continuous time stochastic processes in the pricing of financial derivatives
  4. evaluate econometric models for high frequency data
  5. evaluate the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ETC3460, and at least one of: ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450, ETC5346, ETC5340, ETC5341 or ETC5345 or obtain permission.

Prohibitions


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedClayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Synopsis

This graduate seminar subject is compulsory for PhD candidates. PhD and masters candidates proceeding by major thesis are required to present at least two seminars, one at an early stage to outline their thesis proposal and the second towards the end of candidature, preferably before writing-up has commenced. Masters candidates are required to present at least one seminar at a time to be determined in consultation with their supervisor.

Outcomes

The learning goal associated with this unit is to develop an understanding of the breadth of research interests in the disciplines of econometrics and business statistics.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Colin O'Hare

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based on their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the skills to present an area of research in the discipline of actuarial science in a non-technical manner, both written and oral
  2. grow in ability to ask and address critical questions about research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 288 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate. Students interested in a reading subject of this type should first consult the unit leader.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Enrolment is only by permission from the Unit Coordinator


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate. Students interested in a reading subject of this type should first consult the unit leader.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Enrolment is only by permission from the Unit Coordinator


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jiti Gao

Synopsis

Presents newly developed econometric methodology in model building and model evaluation in general. Recent literature on assessing business time series properties, non-linear time series models, multiple cointegration, impulse response function and variance decomposition is introduced. Examples in business, economics and finance will be drawn to illustrate the application of techniques covered in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. test the properties of economic and financial time series under various conditions such as structural breaks and asymmetric assessment due to business cycles
  2. test if the modelling framework for the relationship between variables should be linear or nonlinear
  3. test for the existence of long run relationship and if it is nonlinear and stable
  4. conduct multivariate framework time series analysis based on vector auto regression
  5. test for the presence of multi-long run relationships and estimate the vector auto regressive model.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 4412, 3816 or 3822 or must have passed ETF3200 or ETF9200 or ETF3300 or ETC3410 or ETC5341 or ETF5320 or by permission.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Synopsis

Review of basic time series analysis techniques. Moving averages and exponential smoothing forecasting methods. Box-Jenkins method of forecasting. Comparison of forecasting techniques. Introduction to time series regression, dynamic models and cointegration. Applications to time series from accounting, economics, banking, finance and management areas. Use of Excel and SPSS.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the basic tools of forecasting and define the basic time series analysis techniques
  2. describe the decomposition techniques, exponential smoothing forecasting techniques and Box-Jenkins method of forecasting
  3. compare the forecasts of real economic, business and financial time series by decomposition techniques and exponential smoothing techniques using Excel and Box Jenkins method using SPSS
  4. differentiate between decomposition methods, exponential smoothing methods and autoregressive methods of forecasting
  5. analyse time series in the business environment using the appropriate methods and interpret computer output.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETX2111, ETF2100, ETX2121, ETF2121, ETF9100, ETF5910, ETF9121, ETF5912, ETF9300, ETF5930, MBA9007, MBA5907 or equivalent.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Bill Zhang

Synopsis

Illustrates how statistical and econometric methods can be applied to financial data to solve problems arising in financial markets. Also covers modelling, estimating and testing the volatility of financial markets. Practical examples will be discussed in lectures to enhance the understanding of analysing financial data using the statistical and econometric tools taught in this unit. An integral component will be the completion of a number of minor research projects enabling students to develop the necessary skills.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the issues involved when modelling the dynamics of financial markets
  2. estimate volatility models using econometrics software
  3. critically evaluate the financial econometrics literature
  4. explain the financial market applications of the non linear models developed
  5. undertake a research project that applies the techniques and analysis to a financial market of interest.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 4412 or 3822, or must have passed either ETF3200, ETF3300, ETC3460, ETF5930, ETF9300 or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in applied econometrics. The topics covered are linear regression models with random regressors, method of moments and instrumental variables estimations; simultaneous equations models; models for time-series data; introduction to maximum likelihood estimation; models for discrete dependent variables and models for panel data. EViews computer software is used to carry out data analysis and estimation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in linear regression models with random regressors using the method of moments and the instrumental variables estimators
  2. conduct statistical inference for simultaneous equations models
  3. understand the statistical properties of nonstationary macroeconomic time series data and how to model the long-run relationships among co-integrated time series
  4. conduct statistical inference in models with discrete dependent variables
  5. conduct statistical inference in panel data models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed either ETF2100, ETF9100, ETF5910 or equivalent or must be enrolled in course 3822 or 4412.

Prohibitions

ETC3410, ETF3200, ETF9200, ETF5920


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit would be

  1. invaluable for any student intending to work in applied econometrics, and
  2. essential to understand journal articles in econometrics. This unit introduces some of the essentials to develop a working knowledge of econometrics for large samples. The topics covered include, weak law of large numbers, multivariate central limit theorem, large sample properties of the least squares estimator in the linear model, large sample properties of maximum likelihood estimators, and applications of these to some econometric models used in applied econometric research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define different models used in econometrics and statistics
  2. compare different methods of estimating and testing econometric models
  3. recommend suitable methods of inference
  4. evaluate different methods of inference for econometric models
  5. summarise the advantages and disadvantages of various methods of inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3816 or 3822 or 3194 or 4412 or be granted permission. It is recommended that students should have a high level of familiarity with the topics covered in ETF2100 and ETF2700.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Synopsis

Topics may include hypothesis testing, Bayesian econometrics, non-linear models, duality theory, specification analysis, spectral analysis, cointegration, applied time series, limited dependent variable models, economy wide modelling, models of demand and production functions, state space time series models and multivariate methods. Additional topics may be covered by visiting staff.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define different models used in econometrics and statistics
  2. compare different methods of estimating and testing econometric models
  3. recommend suitable methods of inference
  4. evaluate different methods of inference for econometric models
  5. summarise the advantages and disadvantages of various methods of inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 4412 or 3822, or have passed ETF3200 or ETC4400 or ETC4410 or equivalent.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Synopsis

This graduate seminar subject is compulsory for PhD candidates. PhD and masters candidates proceeding by major thesis are required to present at least two seminars, one at an early stage to outline their thesis proposal and the second towards the end of candidature, preferably before writing-up has commenced. Masters candidates are required to present at least one seminar at a time to be determined in consultation with their supervisor.

Outcomes

The learning goal associated with this unit is to develop an understanding of the breadth of research interests in the disciplines of econometrics and business statistics.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tissa Galagedera

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop quantitative problem solving skills. The emphasis is on recognising and identifying, modelling and solving problems arising in business-decision. Various optimisation techniques used in the business decision-making process will be introduced. Topics include benchmarking with data envelopment analysis, game theory, queuing models, Markov chains and simulation modelling. Applications in business, particularly in management, marketing, banking and finance will be used in the demonstration.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the complementary nature of the rational and behavioural approaches to decision making
  2. select and apply quantitative modelling concepts to problems arising from business
  3. formulate an appropriate model to analyse various business decision problems
  4. apply tools available in Microsoft Excel and algorithms to generate solutions and appraise the solutions through the use of sensitivity analysis
  5. communicate the analysis and results of business decision problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Synopsis

Adopts a very practical approach to introducing multivariate statistical techniques currently popular in analysis of business and marketing survey data. Main topics: review of statistical tools, factor analysis, structural equation modelling, cluster analysis, discriminant analysis, correspondence analysis and multivariate analysis of variance. Use of SPSS software. Case studies and exercises will be drawn from diverse areas of the business world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce exploratory factor analysis and structural equation modelling
  2. show how multiple regression and multivariate analysis of covariance can be used to analyse survey data
  3. give students exposure to logistic regression in discrete-choice modelling studies
  4. demonstrate the role of cluster analysis and multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis in understanding multivariate data
  5. provide students an opportunity to become competent in the use of a statistical package (SPSS).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: ETX2121, ETF5912, ETF2121, ETF2100, ETF5910, ETX2111, MBA9007, ETF9100, MBA5907 or equivalent.

Prohibitions


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Heather Anderson

Synopsis

Under supervision, students are expected to undertake and report on an original research topic that addresses a contemporary and significant issue in the field of applied or theoretical econometrics. Students must find a suitable supervisor and have selected an appropriate area of research in order to undertake this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the knowledge and skill pertinent to the area of research undertaken
  2. survey critically the relevant literature
  3. understand and appreciate the relationship of the research undertaken to that of others
  4. contribute to the knowledge of the subject
  5. communicate and present the findings in writing in a manner that is logical and coherent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 24 points at Level 5 from the Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics.


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Param Silvapulle

Synopsis

Students are required to undertake and report on an original research topic that addresses a contemporary and significant issue in the field of applied or theoretical econometrics and to present that research at seminar presentations and in a thesis of between 20,000 and 25,000 words in length. Students must find a suitable supervisor, have selected an appropriate area of research and have obtained the approval of their course director before undertaking this unit. The minor thesis is expected to be of sufficient standard and practical relevance so as to be suitable for publication in a peer-reviewed journal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the knowledge and skill pertinent to the area of research undertaken
  2. survey critically the relevant literature
  3. understand and appreciate the relationship of the research undertaken to that of others
  4. contribute to the knowledge of the subject
  5. communicate and present the findings in writing in a manner that is logical and coherent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: Review of regression analysis, Binomial dependent variables, Unordered multinomial dependent variables, Ordered multinomial dependent variables, Duration dependent variable. Computer software EViews will be used to apply these techniques to real world problems.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to demonstrate a solid understanding of regression analysis; modelling and analysing relationships with binomial, unordered and ordered multinomial and duration dependent variables. Students will apply their skills and knowledge of the above topics to real situations in areas such as marketing, economics and management. They will demonstrate their ability to use the relevant software to help with the analysis of the above topics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination: 65%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course codes 3816 or 3822 or 4412 or must have passed ETF2100 or or ETF5910 or ETF9100.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)

Notes

Completion of MGX5961 and MGX5690 is recommended.

Synopsis

This unit complements students' practical understanding of business practices by introducing quantitative techniques in optimisation. Of particular interest are those techniques designed to improve the efficiency and transparency of supply chains, retailing and operations. Topics covered include quantitative techniques for forecasting, waiting lines, process modelling, logistics, resource planning and e-commerce. Students will learn to apply such methods in business settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. develop business modelling skills and recognise the importance of optimisation techniques in solving business problems
  2. understand the role of optimisation approaches for dealing with uncertainty in the business environment
  3. develop basic skills in forecasting for business decisions
  4. apply optimisation tools to facilitate movement of information and resources through a business process
  5. recognise the role of online tools in business operation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing, and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Applications to critical analysis of business and economic data will be emphasised. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data
  6. develop the skills for critical analysis of statistical reporting and inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students enrolled in course 3822, 4412 and 3818 cannot undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX9510, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100 and ETC9000.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich (First semester); Professor Param Silvapulle (Second semester)

Synopsis

Econometrics is a set of research tools employed not only in economics but also in business disciplines. This unit covers the basic tools for estimation in the context of simple and multiple linear regression, the sampling properties of the least squares estimator, statistical inference and hypothesis testing. It also covers regression with dummy variables, model specification issues and estimation problems when least squares assumptions are violated. EViews is used as the software package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply econometric tools to modelling, estimation, inference, and forecasting in the context of real world economic and business problems
  2. formulate and test hypotheses about the relationships between variables
  3. understand the nature and consequences of violation of the classical assumptions and know how to test for violations
  4. apply the skills and knowledge from the unit to real situations in business and economics, critically analysis and evaluate the results from applications, and make policy recommendations
  5. demonstrate the ability to generate and analyse EViews computer output for business and economic applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination: 65%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: ETX1100, ETF1100, ETF5900, ETX5900, ETX9000, MBA9007, MBA5907.

Prohibitions

ETF5934, ETX9344, ETX5934, ETF2100, ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETF9100


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Elizabeth Maharaj (First semester); Dr Mindi Nath (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit will introduce statistical concepts and their applications to business sectors of finance, accounting, marketing and management. Topics covered include: sampling techniques, confidence intervals and hypothesis testing (for both single populations and between populations). The multiple regression models and time series models -- that are very popular in data analysis and forecasting in public sectors and industries -- will be covered in detail in this unit. Prerequisites ETX1100, BFF5951 or AFX9510 will not apply to students who enrol in the Graduate Diploma in Applied Econometrics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define different sampling techniques and use Excel to generate samples from these techniques
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the role of inference and hypothesis testing in statistics and their value when applied in financial, marketing and management fields
  3. conduct hypothesis tests for means and proportions of single populations, identify significant differences between two populations in terms of means, proportions and variances and interpret the value of these techniques in business
  4. interpret and analyse the results of a regression analysis using a linear model, a model which incorporates dummy variables, or models involving nonlinear terms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Elizabeth Maharaj (First semester)
Dr Mindi Nath (Second semester)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units ETX1100, ETF1100, ETX9000, ETF5900, ETX5900, BFF5951 or AFX9510 or have permission from the unit coordinator.

Prohibitions

ETF9121, ETX2121, ETF2121, ETX2111, ETW2111, ETB2111, ETC1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Param Silvapulle (Semester 1); Dr Hsein Kew (Semester 2)

Synopsis

This unit covers statistics econometrics tools to: analyse and model the key characteristics of empirical distributions of asset returns; model and estimate the simple capital asset pricing model and its extensions; and test for various financial market hypotheses. It includes modelling, estimating and analysing time series properties of stationary and non-stationary financial data: and modelling and estimating simple and multivariate long-run relationships among financial variables; and conducting Granger causality testing. It also includes modelling and estimation of ARCH/GARCH volatilities and time-varying risk premium on financial assets; and estimation of value-at-risks and expected shortfalls of assets and portfolios. Students will be requested to work through a number of questions and projects with a broad range of financial data sets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe, interpret and critically analyse financial data
  2. apply the simple and multivariate models and theory to model the relationship among financial variables, interpret the results, and conduct reliable statistical inference
  3. test for stationary behaviour of financial time series
  4. model the long-run relationships among financial time series
  5. model the volatility in financial data and perform value-at-risk calculations that are used as an input into the financial decision making process
  6. be proficient at econometric modelling of financial data using the software EVIEWS, which is widely used in the commercial world.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Param Silvapulle (Semester 1)
Dr Hsein Kew (Semester 2)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3818, 3850 or 4412, or must have passed AFF9641, BFF5925 or AFF9250.

Prohibitions

ETC3460, ETC5346, ETF3300, ETF9300


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bruce Stephens

Synopsis

Operations in business and government inevitably entail risk which, of course, must be incorporated into decision making. This unit, supported by software such as @Risk, presents basic quantitative methods for identifying and analysing risk - with broad applicability to areas such as finance, quality control, occupational health and safety, disaster prevention and environmental management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse risk statistically by summarising and interpreting data using techniques of descriptive statistics including the use of associated spreadsheet functions
  2. analyse and evaluate risk by applying concepts of probability and of probability distributions
  3. analyse and evaluate risk via Monte Carlo simulation, using @Risk software
  4. evaluate decision-making strategies, including use of PrecisionTree software
  5. describe and analyse the quality of production in an industrial process, using statistical control charts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 45%
Examination: 55%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ETX2011, ETF2011, ETX3011, ETX9520


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bruce Stephens

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: The Linear Model, Linear Simultaneous Equations, Non-linear functions, Financial Mathematics, Derivatives and Partial Differentiation, Optimization (constrained and non-constrained), Matrix Algebra, and Difference equations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills in solving equations and applying them to problems arising in business
  2. understand the features of linear and nonlinear models and their applications in economics, finance and business
  3. solve two and three dimensional simultaneous equations, with applications in areas including operations management
  4. work with arithmetic and geometric sequences and series and use them in financial applications
  5. develop skills to perform differentiation, optimisation (constrained and unconstrained) and basic matrix operations and apply them to understand and solve problems in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

ETF2700 and ETF9700


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalised Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor John Madden

Synopsis

This unit covers the theoretical structure and application of computable general equilibrium (CGE) models. Topics include:

  • the derivation of the model's non-linear equation system
  • evaluation of coefficients and parameters, model closure, specification of economic shocks, solution techniques and interpretation of results. During hands-on computing sessions, students will undertake simulations of a series of economic policy questions and analyse results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Econometrics and Business Statistics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Brett Inder; Dr Kathryn Cornwell; Mr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity. Students will learn how to critically analyse empirical economic studies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data
  6. develop the skills of critical analysis of empirical economic work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETC1010, ETC2010 or ETC1031

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETC4344 and ETX9344


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to probability theory and statistical inference for graduate studies in econometrics and business statistics and related fields. It is intended to prepare research students for a range of other units in econometrics and business statistics. The first part will cover basic probability theory and the second half will be concerned with aspects of statistical inference. Some prior exposure to the topics to at least the advanced undergraduate level will be assumed. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some basic quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure that students have the necessary familiarity with the essentials of probability theory and statistical inference to be able to read graduate level books and journal articles in econometrics and business statistics
  2. minimise rote learning and to encourage students to provide justification to econometric and statistical ideas and to derive results from first principals. To this end, students need to know the basic definitions, concepts and the chain of arguments on which the econometric and statistical theory is built.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in either the 3194 Master of Philosophy or the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy to enrol in this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Don Poskitt and Dr Bonsoo Koo

Synopsis

This unit provides a rigorous treatment of core methods of econometric estimation and inference in a single and also multiple equation settings. While students are encouraged to look at every problem from several views (informal, algebraic, geometric, etc.), a large emphasis is placed on constructing formal arguments, and the importance of clear notation, definitions, assumptions and deductive arguments is emphasised. Formal lectures and references to graduate level textbooks are provided, and students are also assigned and encouraged to read some classic journal articles. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure PhD candidates master the core elements of econometrics to be able to generalise and apply these principles to research questions
  2. encourage and train PhD students to grind through complex scholarly journal articles and harvest the elements needed to conduct research
  3. train PhD students in developing a habit of using clear notation and clear arguments in research work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have successfully completed ETX6500 or BEX6500 to enrol in this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Nell Kimberley

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide opportunities for staff to develop knowledge and skills by focusing on issues relevant to their teaching contexts and disciplines. Participants are expected to complete five modules along with required assessment tasks. Credit may also be given to academic staff for attendance at relevant university seminars, however, these must be approved by the Unit Co-ordinator and must incorporate appropriate assessment. As part of their academic development, full-time staff currently employed by the faculty will also be encouraged to attend these workshops.

Outcomes

The learning goals are associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate approaches to the support of learning and teaching that influence, motivate and inspire students to learn;
  2. develop curricula, resources and services that reflect a command of the field of study;
  3. implement approaches to assessment, feedback and learning support that foster independent learning;
  4. employ strategies that demonstrate respect and support for the development of students as individuals;
  5. design scholarly activities or service innovations that influence and enhance learning and teaching.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Graduate Certificate in Higher Education to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Nell Kimberley

Synopsis

Enthusiastic and engaged teachers continually evaluate and modify aspects of their units in an effort to enhance student learning. This unit affords participants the opportunity to explore and improve their teaching practices by adopting an action learning model. Focusing on teaching and learning issues arising from HED5043 Contemporary issues in business education, participants will be required to apply a teaching intervention (or interventions) to their curricula (for example a technological intervention arising from Module 5) and to critically evaluate its effectiveness, and to instigate further changes and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply an action learning model to enhance teaching practice
  2. identify, justify and implement an appropriate teaching or learning intervention/s
  3. use appropriate methods of evaluation of a teaching or learning intervention/s
  4. reflect critically on the teaching intervention/s using the education literature
  5. identify areas of teaching or learning that require improvement
  6. critically reflect on the findings in relation to the intervention/s and devise a plan for further improvement.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Graduate Certificate in Higher Education to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vivek Chaudhri

Synopsis

Strategic management is concerned with creating organisations that create value to all stakeholders in a turbulent world. This unit integrates material from earlier units in the MBA degree, in particular from marketing, accounting, operations, individual and organisational behaviour, information technology and finance within a strategic framework. On completion of the unit students should be able to understand the key influences on the development of an organisation's strategy, analyse those influences, propose appropriate strategic behaviour for an organisation and demonstrate an understanding of how strategic change can occur within an organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the key influences on strategy, both external and internal
  2. critically analyse the concepts and tools of strategic management
  3. recommend a strategy for a firm
  4. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

Effective management of human capital has the potential to be a source of sustainable competitive advantage for high-performance organisations. This unit examines various ways in which organisations can effectively lead and managed human capital for growth and profits, innovation and sustainable competitive advantage. The unit consists of three modules: managing individual motivation, behaviour and engagement at work; managing people and the human resource function; and the design of high performance human resource systems. As well as drawing on contemporary research on strategic HRM and the high performance workplace, the unit covers a wide range of real-world case and practical challenges in managing people and human capital in diverse organisational settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase knowledge of leading ideas and trends in strategic human resource management and high performance work systems
  2. develop personal and organisational strategies for managing and leading people and teams at work in different organisational settings
  3. acquire practical skills through the application of knowledge to the diagnosis of real-world cases, and to solving problems in the design and management of effective people management systems
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit is one of six specialist units that provide students with exposure to prominent visiting professors presenting a range of leading edge topics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge and comprehension and to critically evaluate key theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a specified specialist field
  2. demonstrate an ability to apply these theories, concepts, tools and techniques in an appropriate business context
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%
Option 2: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit is one of six specialist units that provide students with exposure to prominent visiting professors presenting a range of leading edge topics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge and comprehension and to critically evaluate key theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a specified specialist field
  2. demonstrate an ability to apply these theories, concepts, tools and techniques in an appropriate business context
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%
Option 2: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Robert Weisz

Synopsis

This unit is one of six specialist units that provide students with exposure to prominent visiting professors presenting a range of leading edge topics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge and comprehension and to critically evaluate key theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a specified specialist field
  2. demonstrate an ability to apply these theories, concepts, tools and techniques in an appropriate business context
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%
Option 2: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Veronique Ambrosini

Synopsis

This unit is one of six specialist units that provide students with exposure to prominent visiting professors presenting a range of leading edge topics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge and comprehension and to critically evaluate key theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a specified specialist field
  2. demonstrate an ability to apply these theories, concepts, tools and techniques in an appropriate business context
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%

Option 2: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit is one of six specialist units that provide students with exposure to prominent visiting professors presenting a range of leading edge topics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge and comprehension and to critically evaluate key theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a specified specialist field
  2. demonstrate an ability to apply these theories, concepts, tools and techniques in an appropriate business context
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%
Option 2: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Owen Hughes

Synopsis

Strategy began as a field of study with the military use of the term and by analogy later with business. The military use persists in strategic studies and the contrast between strategy and tactics. Both strategy in this sense and in the business strategy sense draw on early theorists such as Sun Tze, Thucydides, Machiavelli and Clausewitz. The aim of this unit is to link scholarship of the classic thinkers with practical experience. This unit is based on case studies with the focus on real world strategic situations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the derivation of ideas about strategy
  2. demonstrate a knowledge and awareness of key thinkers about strategy in different historical and locational contexts
  3. critically evaluate how these different theories can be applicable to the contemporary setting
  4. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

Students will work closely with an academic staff member assisted by a company staff member. They will be guided through the processes of -- proposal preparation; data collection and analysis; project implementation; business planning and project reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical context
  2. demonstrate an ability to analyse, synthesise and evaluate a business situation and to develop appropriate recommendations in the form of a consulting report
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028 Master of Business Administration to undertake this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

Students will work closely with an academic staff member assisted by a company staff member. They will be guided through the processes of; proposal preparation, data collection and analysis, project implementation, business planning -- project reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical context
  2. demonstrate an ability to analyse, synthesise and evaluate a business situation and to develop appropriate recommendations in the form of a consulting report
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vivek Chaudhri

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to equip students with the knowledge and skills to develop and utilise effectively strategies for negotiations and decision making. In an increasingly complex and dynamic business environment, negotiation and decision-making are have become core capabilities associated with effective management and leadership of organisations. Drawing on cross-disciplinary perspectives and recent advances in the field of negotiation, this unit will equip students to recognize and overcome flaws in their negotiation and decision making processes and develop frameworks for analysing situations and making sound decisions; and provide a practical and experiential introduction to principles of effective negotiation in diverse industry and functional contexts faced by contemporary organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a systematic framework for improving negotiation and decision-making outcomes
  2. identify common cognitive biases that obstruct optimal decision-making in negotiation and other business contexts
  3. provide a practical introduction to negotiation and decision-making dilemmas through experiential learning
  4. acquire strategies to overcome weaknesses associated with different personal styles in negotiation and conflict management
  5. develop new strategies to improve creativity and flexibility in resolving complex problems and negotiations in diverse industry and business contexts
  6. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Synopsis

This case-based unit is designed to provide an overview of the strategic economic and legal environment of business at the global, market, and organisational levels and the role of individuals in such an environment. The focus of this unit will be to investigate important socio-political/legal dimensions and the contemporary context of senior managerial decision making. To this end, students will examine the myriad issues challenging the pursuit of sustainable business practice as a precursor to the more detailed consideration of functional methods that help inform these decisions that will follow in the subsequent module.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce students to a preliminary overview of the economic, legal, political and social environment in which day to day business operations are managed
  2. illustrate the role of markets, the organisation and the individual in such an environment in determining business outcomes
  3. explain the development of business regulation in terms of contracts, employment, market power and environmental management
  4. facilitate an understanding of the role of globalisation and technological change in relation to the growth of economies and sustainability
  5. apply critical thinking to case-based analysis
  6. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028 Master of Business Administration to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Trimester 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

Environmental, social and ethical issues are increasingly influencing business decisions. The ability to create value from, and mitigate risks associated with, environmental, social and ethical issues increasingly impacts markets, access to capital, company reputation and shareholder value. Through the use of case studies, lectures and guest speakers, this unit will critically examine sustainability challenges across a range of industry settings and develop strategies to address these issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse concepts, theories and practice in the highly dynamic field of corporate sustainability management
  2. understand the conceptual frameworks and practical tools to apply sustainability in an organisational setting
  3. critically analyse competing demands on business and the ethics of business activity
  4. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Cristina Neesham

Synopsis

This foundational unit focuses on the practice and development of key critical thinking and problem solving skills required by a business leader to achieve superior performance. Through interactive group work, role play, case studies and a variety of situational exercises, this unit will enable students to understand and apply analytical reasoning to:

  1. successfully manage business problems; and
  2. interpret and produce clear and sound arguments in relation to business issues of general interest. In addition, students will develop questioning strategies to support a critical inquiry approach to their learning and research activities throughout the Program.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. effectively interpret problem situations and the reasoning produced by self and others
  2. analyse and evaluate concepts, assumptions, explanations, arguments and solutions for business problems
  3. identify, correct and prevent errors in thinking and problem solving in business
  4. apply strategic thinking to learning and personal development goals
  5. apply ethical reasoning to problem solving and decision making in business
  6. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Trimester 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Ian McLoughlin

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to equip students with the knowledge to understand and the capacity to manage innovation at the operational and strategic levels. Innovation drives sustainable competitive advantage in organizations. It requires integration of multiple organizational functions but particularly those that impact product and process development. The operations function, in particular, provides a key focus for innovation that is both economically and technologically sound. Modern innovation for competitive advantage reaches beyond organizational boundaries into the realm of customer, supplier and third party integration. Innovation through supply chain integration increasingly occurs at both the product and the process level. The objective of this unit is to examine the foundations of innovation in product and process for the organization and its supply chain. It explores innovation at the design, process and system level that is both user-led and technology-led. It explores concepts that include the nature of innovation and what drives it, new frontiers of innovation in operations and supply chains and future frontiers in social and environmental innovation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the process for managing innovation at the operational and strategic level, specifically by recognising the relationship between markets, technological change and organisational change
  2. understand how innovation in products and processes contribute to competitive advantage in both operations and the supply chain and the effectiveness of other forms of organisation
  3. explore the innovation process and in particular the contributions of both user-led and technology-led innovation as well as knowledge management around these
  4. analyse the process of innovation across a range of organisational, operational, technological and market settings and examples
  5. expand the concept of innovation to include future frontiers such as social and environmental innovation for sustainable competitive advantage
  6. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

The unit exposes students to the 'economics lens' for reasoning in business. Topics to be considered include demand, supply and market analysis, cost concepts, price determination and pricing practices. The course aims to develop an understanding of the competitive environment facing firms through analysis of varying market structures (oligopoly, monopolistic competition etc).

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a broad appreciation of economic concepts and theories, methodology of microeconomics and knowledge of the tools used by economists in decision making
  2. develop an understanding of the competitive environment facing firms by means of an analysis of the varying types of market competition (competitive markets, monopoly, monopolistic competition and oligopoly)
  3. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit examines the structures, processes, content and interface between financial and management accounting, which assists organisations in planning, decision making and control to create sustainable economic, social and environmental value.

The financial accounting component is concerned with the information requirements of external users such as owners, lenders, regulatory authorities and potential investors. Herein the focus concerns the measurement of performance, valuation of assets and liabilities, and determination of the financial strength and 'health' of the organisation.

The management accounting component is concerned with the information needs of internal users at various levels of responsibility and with varying functional responsibilities. Herein the focus concerns issues such as the nature and behaviour of costs, budgets and budgetary control, and measuring and managing performance so as to enhance organisational competitiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply the theory and techniques of financial and management accounting practices to different organisational scenarios
  2. examine, interpret and communicate accounting information to users for use in planning, decision making and control
  3. develop capabilities that assist organisations in creating sustainable economic, social and environmental value.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia Trimester 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit introduces finance theories and practices that can assist financial decisions in for-profit firms. Herein investigation concerns exploration of the interrelated aspects of making decisions from an investing, financing and operating perspective. Using the body of knowledge that comes from finance theories and practices, students will learn the analytical skills required to solve these problems.

Further, the unit will examine key aspects of financial decisions (capital budgeting, financing, dividend policy and hedging) that managers in non-financial firms are required to make.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the firm as a financial entity and to appreciate the definition and measurement of value in a for profit context
  2. apply finance theories and practices such as the quantification of risk and return and the valuation of firms
  3. acquire competences with computational and analytical skills required to evaluate the financial goals and performance of the firm including the interpretation of financial data
  4. appraise the principal financial activities of firms with respect to investing, financing, dividend policy and risk management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

The first objective of this unit is for students to understand which data analysis technique is appropriate to address a business problem and then, with the support of the relevant software, to apply that technique. The second objective is for students to learn how to interpret the results and extract useful business insights. An applied approach will be taken. Topics covered include data description and summation, data mining, confidence intervals and hypothesis testing, regression analysis, time series and forecasting and decision making under uncertainty.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build the analytical skills of the student through their understanding and applying a range of data analysis techniques
  2. develop an understanding of how to interpret statistical findings and draw relevant insights in a business context
  3. enhance report writing skills by developing an understanding of the process of preparing a business report based on insight gained from statistical analyses
  4. enhance communication, interpersonal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

Effective management of people can benefit organisational performance. This unit examines how organisations can effectively lead and manage people for competitive advantage in diverse organisational settings. The unit considers the human resource function, managing individual motivation, behaviour and engagement and high performance human resource systems. The unit covers a wide range of real-world cases and practical challenges.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase knowledge of leading ideas and trends in managing people
  2. develop personal and organisational strategies for managing and leading people in different organisational settings
  3. acquire practical skills through the application of knowledge to the diagnosis of real-world cases, and to solving problems in the design and management of people
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This is an introductory managerial course in marketing. It will provide participants with a basic understanding of the key strategic concepts in marketing and their application in an organisation. The key question it will seek to answer is: "How should managers strategically manage their market offerings to enable value for their firms, their customers, and business partners?"

The course will address diverse situations of marketing to consumers and business customers, product and service-oriented businesses, domestic and global firms, and business and social organisations. The predominant pedagogy is case-based, and thus classroom discussion will emphasise strategic decision-making situations. The decision orientation will be supplemented with contemporary scholarly thought on effective marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. analysing competitive market situations presented through case studies in meaningful qualitative and quantitative ways
  2. critically evaluating alternative strategic marketing solutions from the vantage point of key strategic marketing concepts and theories (including ethics and responsibility)
  3. demonstrating overall cumulative understanding and application of concepts
  4. exhibiting small-group and large-group communication skills and contributions to peer learning
  5. developing capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

Environmental, social and ethical issues are increasingly influencing business decisions. The ability to create value from, and mitigate risks associated with, environmental, social and ethical issues increasingly impacts markets, access to capital, company reputation and shareholder value. Through the use of case studies, lectures and guest speakers, this unit will critically examine corporate sustainability across a range of industry settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse concepts, theories and practice in the highly dynamic field of corporate sustainability management
  2. understand the conceptual frameworks and practical tools to apply sustainability in business settings and
  3. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia Trimester 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

Innovation drives sustainable competitive advantage in organisations. The aim of this unit is to equip students with the knowledge to understand and manage innovation. The unit requires integration of multiple organisational functions but particularly those that impact product and process development. The objective of this unit is to examine the foundations of innovation in product and process for the organisation and its supply chain. It explores innovation at the design, process and system level that is both user-led and technology-led.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the process for managing innovation at the operational and strategic level, specifically by recognising the relationship between markets, technological change and organisational change
  2. understand how innovation in products and processes contribute to competitive advantage in both operations and the supply chain
  3. explore the innovation process both user-led and technology-led innovation as well as knowledge management around these
  4. analyse the process of innovation managing across a range of organisational settings and examples
  5. expand the concept of managing innovation for sustainable competitive advantage
  6. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0028 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Malaysia MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vivek Chaudhri

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to equip students with the knowledge and skills to develop and utilise effective strategies for negotiations. Drawing on cross-disciplinary perspectives and recent advances in the field of negotiation, this unit will equip students to recognise and overcome flaws in their negotiation and decision making processes and develop frameworks for analysing situations and making sound decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a systematic framework for improving negotiations
  2. identify common cognitive biases that obstruct optimal decision-making in negotiation and other business contexts
  3. provide a practical introduction to negotiation and decision-making dilemmas through experiential learning
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 5 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Synopsis

The unit exposes students to the 'economics lens' for reasoning in business. Topics to be considered include demand, supply and market analysis, cost concepts, price determination and pricing practices. The course aims to develop an understanding of the competitive environment facing firms through analysis of varying market structures (oligopoly, monopolistic competition etc).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a broad appreciation of economic concepts and theories, the methodology of microeconomics and knowledge of the tools used by economists in decision making
  2. develop an understanding of the competitive environment facing firms by means of an analysis of the varying types of market competition (competitive markets, monopoly, monopolistic competition and oligopoly)
  3. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit examines the structures, processes, content and interface between financial and management accounting, which assists organisations in planning, decision making and control to create sustainable economic, social and environmental value. The financial accounting component is concerned with the information requirements of external users such as owners, lenders, regulatory authorities and potential investors. Herein the focus concerns the measurement of performance, valuation of assets and liabilities, and determination of the financial strength and 'health' of the organisation. The management accounting component is concerned with the information needs of internal users at various levels of responsibility and with varying functional responsibilities. Herein the focus concerns issues such as the nature and behaviour of costs, budgets and budgetary control, and measuring and managing performance so as to enhance organisational competitiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply the theory and techniques of financial and management accounting practices to different organisational scenarios
  2. examine, interpret and communicate accounting information to users for use in planning, decision making and control
  3. develop capabilities that assist organisations in creating sustainable economic, social and environmental value.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MBA5904, MBA9004, GSB9004, ACF5950, AFX9500, ACF5955, AFX9550, ACF5903, AFX9003


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Trimester 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr John Vaz

Synopsis

This unit introduces finance theories and practices that can assist financial decisions in for-profit firms. Herein investigation concerns exploration of the interrelated aspects of making decisions from an investing, financing and operating perspective. Using the body of knowledge that comes from finance theories and practices, students will learn the analytical skills required to solve these problems. Further, the unit will examine key aspects of financial decisions (capital budgeting, financing, dividend policy and hedging) that managers in non-financial firms are required to make.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the firm as a financial entity and to appreciate the definition and measurement of value in a for profit context
  2. apply finance theories and practices such as the quantification of risk and return and the valuation of firms
  3. acquire competences with computational and analytical skills required to evaluate the financial goals and performance of the firm including the interpretation of financial data
  4. appraise the principal financial activities of firms with respect to investing, financing, dividend policy and risk management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MBA5905, MBA9005, BFG5944, AFG9044, BFF5904, AFX9004, BFF5925, AFF9250, BFF5954, AFX9540


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Malaysia MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vivek Chaudhri

Synopsis

This unit integrates material from earlier units in the MBA degree and provides the context for business and corporate strategic decision making. On completion of the unit students should be able to understand the key influences on the development of an organisation's strategy, analyse those influences, propose appropriate strategic behaviour for an organisation and demonstrate an understanding of how strategic change can occur within an organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the key influences on strategy, both external and internal
  2. critically analyse the concepts and tools of strategic management
  3. recommend a strategy for a firm
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Robert Brooks

Synopsis

The first objective of this unit is for students to understand which data analysis technique is appropriate to address a business problem and then, with the support of the relevant software, to apply that technique. The second objective is for students to learn how to interpret the results and extract useful business insights. An applied approach will be taken. Topics covered include data description and summation, data mining, confidence intervals and hypothesis testing, regression analysis, time series and forecasting and decision making under uncertainty. Software used will be Microsoft Excel, with Palisade add-ins.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build the analytical skills of the student through their understanding and applying a range of data analysis techniques
  2. develop an understanding of how to interpret statistical findings and draw relevant insights in a business context
  3. enhance report writing skills by developing an understanding of the process of preparing a business report based on insight gained from statistical analyses
  4. enhance communication, interpersonal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

Effective management of people can benefit organisational performance. This unit examines how organisations can effectively lead and manage people for competitive advantage in diverse organisational settings. The unit considers the human resource function, managing individual motivation, behaviour and engagement and high performance human resource systems. The unit covers a wide range of real-world cases and practical challenges.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase knowledge of leading ideas and trends in managing people
  2. develop personal and organisational strategies for managing and leading people in different organisational settings
  3. acquire practical skills through the application of knowledge to the diagnosis of real-world cases, and to solving problems in the design and management of people
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Malaysia Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Synopsis

This case-based unit is designed to provide an overview of the business environment at the global, market, and organisational levels and the role of individuals in such an environment. The focus of this unit will be to investigate important socio-political/legal dimensions and the contemporary context of managerial decision making. To this end, students will examine the myriad of issues challenging the pursuit of sustainable business practice as a precursor to the more detailed consideration of functional methods that help inform these decisions that will follow in the subsequent module.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce students to a preliminary overview of the economic, legal, political and social environment in which day to day business operations are managed
  2. illustrate the role of markets, the organisation and the individual in the business environment
  3. facilitate an understanding of the role of globalisation and technological change in relation to the growth of economies and sustainability
  4. apply critical thinking to case-based analysis
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Hean Tat Keh

Synopsis

This is an introductory managerial course in marketing. It will provide participants with a basic understanding of the key strategic concepts in marketing and their application in an organisation. The key question it will seek to answer is: "how should managers strategically manage their market offerings to enable value for their firms, their customers, and business partners?" The course will address diverse situations of marketing to consumers and business customers, product and service-oriented businesses, domestic and global firms, and business and social organisations. The predominant pedagogy is case-based, and thus classroom discussion will emphasise strategic decision-making situations. The decision orientation will be supplemented with contemporary scholarly thought on effective marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. analysing competitive market situations presented through case studies in meaningful qualitative and quantitative ways
  2. critically evaluating alternative strategic marketing solutions from the vantage point of key strategic marketing concepts and theories (including ethics and responsibility)
  3. demonstrating overall cumulative understanding and application of concepts
  4. exhibiting small-group and large-group communication skills and contributions to peer learning
  5. developing capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MBA9006 and MBA5906


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Stubbs

Synopsis

Environmental, social and ethical issues are increasingly influencing business decisions. The ability to create value from, and mitigate risks associated with, environmental, social and ethical issues increasingly impacts markets, access to capital, company reputation and shareholder value. Through the use of case studies, lectures and guest speakers, this unit will critically examine corporate sustainability across a range of industry settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse concepts, theories and practice in the highly dynamic field of corporate sustainability management
  2. understand the conceptual frameworks and practical tools to apply sustainability in business settings
  3. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 5 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

Students will partake in experiential learning project by working together on a group based project in an assigned organisation. Supervised by an academic member of staff and assisted by the organisation's representative, the group will be guided through the processes of: proposal preparation, data collection and analysis, project implementation, business planning and project reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical context
  2. demonstrate an ability to analyse, synthesise and evaluate a business situation and to develop appropriate recommendations in the form of a consulting report
  3. further enhance communication, interpersonal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the MBA integrating core units and fundamental core units as follows:

MBA5706,MBA5701, MBA5709, MBA5730, MBA5708/MBA5608, MBA5720/MBA5620, MBA5740/MBA5640, MBA5703/MBA5603, MBA5704/MBA5604, MBA5705/MBA560, MBA5715/MBA5615, MBA5707/MBA5607

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedMalaysia MBA Teaching Period 4 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Synopsis

The MBA Study Tour integrates, in a practical manner, the material covered in the MBA program. Depending upon the destination/s chosen (which may vary from year to year), MBA students will partake in a combination of site visits to local organisations, companies and institutions in order to better understand the impact of that location's environment on business and its implications for management. At the end of the MBA Study Tour students are expected to have not only gained an insight into the business environment of the location visited but also be able to draw upon ideas from that environment to develop capabilities that may be able to be applied in other environments and organisational contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the nature of the forces in the environment (e.g. economic, social, legal and cultural) and their impact upon business and management in the location visited
  2. understand and critically analyse business and government relations in the location visited
  3. analyse basic theories and concepts relevant to business and examine how these can provide insight and understanding of how business is conducted in the location visited
  4. gain insights and ideas from the location visited in order to develop capabilities that can be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the MBA integrating core units and fundamental core units as follows:

MBA5706,MBA5701, MBA5709, MBA5730, MBA5708/MBA5608,MBA5720/MBA5620, MBA5740/MBA5640, MBA5703/MBA5603, MBA5704/MBA5604, MBA5705/MBA560, MBA5715/MBA5615, MBA5707/MBA5607

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Malaysia Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Cristina Neesham

Synopsis

This foundational unit focuses on the practice and development of key critical thinking skills required by a business leader to achieve superior performance. Through interactive group work, role play, case studies and a variety of situational exercises, this unit will introduce students to methods of analytical reasoning to successfully manage business problems and interpret and produce clear and sound arguments in relation to business issues of general interest. In addition, students will develop questioning strategies to support a critical inquiry approach to their learning and research activities throughout the program.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. effectively interpret problem situations and the reasoning produced by self and others
  2. analyse and evaluate concepts, assumptions, explanations, arguments and solutions for business problems
  3. identify, correct and prevent errors in thinking and problem solving in business
  4. consider strategic and ethical thinking in individual and business contexts
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield MBA Teaching Period 5 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Synopsis

Innovation drives sustainable competitive advantage in organisations. The aim of this unit is to equip students with the knowledge to understand and manage innovation. The unit requires integration of multiple organisational functions but particularly those that impact product and process development. The objective of this unit is to examine the foundations of innovation in product and process for the organisation and its supply chain. It explores innovation at the design, process and system level that is both user-led and technology-led.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the process for managing innovation at the operational and strategic level, specifically by recognising the relationship between markets, technological change and organisational change
  2. understand how innovation in products and processes contribute to competitive advantage in both operations and the supply chain
  3. explore the innovation process both user-led and technology-led innovation as well as knowledge management around these
  4. analyse the process of innovation managing across a range of organisational settings and examples
  5. expand the concept of managing innovation for sustainable competitive advantage
  6. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in 0028, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3196, 3198, 3839 or 3849 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vivek Chaudhri

Synopsis

Economics for managers is designed to introduce students to the methodology of microeconomics and macroeconomics including the tools used by economists in problem solving. Topics to be considered include demand, supply and market analysis, cost concepts, price determination, pricing practices, inflation, unemployment and interest rate determination. The course aims to develop an understanding of the competitive environment facing firms through analysis of varying market structures (oligopoly, monopolistic competition etc).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a broad appreciation of economic concepts and theories, the methodology of microeconomics and basic macroeconomics and knowledge of the tools used by economists in problem solving
  2. develop an understanding of the competitive environment facing firms by means of an analysis of the varying types of market competition (competitive markets, monopoly, monopolistic competition and oligopoly)
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849, 0028, 4437 or 4405.

Prohibitions

MBA9003


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Joanne Lye

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to financial and management accounting and examines how the two interrelated components of the accounting function are used to generate information that is used by internal and external stakeholders to aid planning, decision making and control. Through a focus on the application of accounting principles, concepts and practices, the unit aims to provide insight into the structure and content of financial and management accounting, as well as the interface between them. This can assist organisations to create sustainable economic, social and environmental value. Further, the unit examines how accounting information is used to gain intelligence about all aspects of business operations, both historic and projected.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, apply and appraise the theory and techniques of accounting practice to different scenarios, and appraise the assumptions and complexities involved
  2. examine, interpret and communicate accounting information to users for use in planning, decision making and control, while demonstrating cognisance of the use, limitations and evolving nature of this information
  3. interpret and evaluate financial information as a basis for making economic decisions about the deployment of resources that can assist organisations in creating sustainable economic, social and environmental value.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849, 0028 or 4437.

Prohibitions

MBA9004, GSB9004, AFX9500, ACX5950, AFX9550, ACF5955, MBA5704


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr John Vaz

Synopsis

This unit is designed as an introduction to finance theories and practices that can assist in the strategic management of decisions in for-profit firms. To achieve this the unit investigates the interrelated aspects of making decisions from an investing, financing and operating perspective. By applying the body of knowledge that comes from finance theories and practices, executives will learn the analytical skills required to solve these problems. The unit takes a value impacting approach to financially related strategic decisions that face executives. Further, the unit examines how financial and economic information is used to gain forward intelligence about impacts on the value of the organisation to create sustainable value.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the firm as a financial entity and to appreciate the definition and measurement of value in a for profit context
  2. apply finance theories and practices such as the quantification of risk and return and the valuation of firms

3 .acquire competences with financial analytical skills required to evaluate the financial goals and performance of the firm including the interpretation of financial data

4. explore and critically evaluate financial decisions regarding capital investment, financing, dividend policy, capital structure and mergers and acquisitions and their relationship with other modes of responsibility within firms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849, 4437 or 0028.

Prohibitions

MBA5705, BFG5944, BFF5904, AFX9004, BFF5925, AFF9250, BFF5954, AFX9540, MBA9005


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Term 2 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gregory Strydom

Synopsis

This is a course aimed at fostering strategic marketing leadership in organisations. It will help participants refine their strategic and conceptual skills in marketing, augment their analytical toolkits, and encourage integrative thought and action. The key question it will seek to answer is: "how should organisations strategically create and exchange market offerings effectively to enable value for themselves, their customers and clients, business partners, and society at large?" The perspective held would be the management of markets, with a view to achieving and sustaining market leading positions. While anchored to the viewpoint of a focal organisation, analysis would include institutions that facilitate the consummation of market exchange in an economy, and the myriad consequences of market management activity on society. The predominant pedagogy is case-based, and thus classroom discussion will emphasise strategic decision-making situations. The decision orientation will be supplemented with contemporary critical-ethical thought on marketing as a discipline of business and society.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse competitive market situations presented through case studies in meaningful qualitative and quantitative ways
  2. critically evaluate alternative strategic marketing solutions from the vantage point of key strategic marketing concepts and theories (including ethics and responsibility)
  3. demonstrate appreciation for organisational decisions, human capabilities and roles involved in the decisions, and the impact of decisions on organisation and society
  4. exhibit empathic and effective small-group problem solving, and large-group leadership skills and contributions to peer learning
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849, 4437 or 0028.

Prohibitions

MBA9006 and MBA5715


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Farshid Vahid

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is for the executive to understand and apply data analysis techniques to address business problems through an applied approach. With the support of software, executives will learn how to apply various analytical tools but, more importantly, understand the findings and interpret their value in a business context. Sharing/communicating these analytically derived insights, so that they are readily accessible to, and actionable by management, is a further objective of this unit. Topics covered include data description and summation, data mining, confidence intervals and hypothesis testing, regression analysis, time series and forecasting and decision making under uncertainty. Software used will be Microsoft Excel, with Palisade add-ins.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the analytical needs in a business context and develop the ability to address these needs using appropriate data analysis techniques
  2. develop an understanding of how to interpret statistical findings and draw relevant insight in a business context
  3. enhance report writing skills by developing an understanding of the process of preparing a business report based on insight gained from statistical analyses
  4. enhance communication, interpersonal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  5. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849, 0028 or 4437

Prohibitions

MBA9007


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

Understanding business principles, and having the data and the will to adapt to the ever changing business environment are crucial for successful business creation and development. The principles and elements of entrepreneurship, finance procurement for new ventures and elements of business planning are integrated into a comprehensive mosaic that will allow students to explore these principles and apply them in a personal and practical way to business creation and business development.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explore the values and principles associated with entrepreneurial thinking
  2. explore elements and types of entrepreneurship and the application of entrepreneurial thinking to business development
  3. understand critical financial elements in business planning
  4. identify and understand the planning process appropriate to establishing a new venture
  5. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028.

Prohibitions

MBA9051


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Joze Kuzic

Synopsis

This subject focuses on a holistic approach to project management. The aim of the subject is to provide students with a high level of understanding of the processes of project management. The subject includes major topics in core and facilitating areas of project management, such as: project integration management, project scope management, project time management, project cost management, project quality management, project human resources management, project communication management, project risk management, and project procurement management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and describe the concepts, techniques and decision tools available to project managers
  2. demonstrate the importance of strategy and prioritising for effective resource allocation and balancing a portfolio of projects
  3. assess and synthesise diverse information for an integrative project management
  4. create and critically evaluate innovative ideas and strategies within ambiguous and uncertain business environment
  5. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 3183, 3184, 3185, 3189, 3190, 3191, 3195, 3196, 3197, 3198, 3837, 3839, 3849 or 0028.

Prohibitions

MBA9052


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alejandro Agafonow

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students moral reasoning about the conduct of business in the global context. They will achieve this by exploring theories of ethics and justice in business and in its relationships with society, across different cultural and religious traditions; and reflecting on their own moral development through analysis of ethical and unethical behaviours in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the relationship between ethics, morals and values in the workplace
  2. explore different perspectives on moral development
  3. examine ethical theories to explain how they contribute to ethical business practices
  4. analyse some of the competing demands on business when scrutinising the ethics of business activity
  5. discuss the relationship between business practice, ethics and religion across different traditions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Rosaria Burchielli (First semester); Dr Michelle Greenwood (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit analyses corporate social responsibility (CSR) from a range of different perspectives. The course is designed within a framework of understanding, applying and managing corporate social responsibility in business; CSR is considered in the context of the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment. Through the use of case studies of Australian and international companies, students will examine CSR challenges across a range of industry settings and develop strategies for responsible management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast the strengths and limitations of a range of models of corporate social responsibility
  2. examine the range of external and internal factors that impact on an organisation's corporate social responsibility
  3. analyse the major corporate social responsibilities of business, in particular within the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment in the context of globalisation
  4. identify the tensions between conflicting business and social responsibilities
  5. critique different managerial approaches to working with stakeholders to address issues of corporate social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Quamrul Alam (First semester)
Dr Michelle Greenwood (Second semester)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Smith

Synopsis

The unit offers a general introduction to contemporary Asia, to regional problems and interactions and the relevant political, economic and other relationships, by identifying and discussing the major issues of the day and their illustration of significant regional themes. Discussion includes an analysis of relevant countries' history and culture as these affect issues and relationships.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and critically evaluate the key events and trends in socio-political, socio-economic and socio-cultural affairs in the separate nation states of contemporary Asia
  2. assess the impact on Australia of selected contemporary events in Asia
  3. investigate the nature of regional interactions and conflicts, based on a comparative analysis of the history, politics, economy and culture of individual countries
  4. examine Australia's role in the region through a focus on her bilateral and multilateral relationships in Asia
  5. select a disciplinary area of interest and conduct an individual research project on one aspect of contemporary affairs in a chosen Asian country.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Synopsis

This unit examines the social, economic and legal dimensions of diversity and inclusion. It aims to provide both theoretical and practical application of contemporary ideas to promote workplace diversity and inclusion. Topics include theoretical perspectives on diversity and inclusion, forms of diversity and inclusion, the legal dimensions of discrimination, the legal framework regulating diversity, inclusion, discrimination and EEO, the strategic business, HRM and employment relations issues associated with promoting diversity and inclusion, the state of workplace diversity in the Australian context, contemporary public policy issues and diversity and inclusion in a comparative context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts of diversity and inclusion applied to the workplace
  2. evaluate the legal, ethical, and professional issues associated with diversity management in the contemporary workplace
  3. identify the strategic business, HRM and employment relations issues associated with developing and implementing diversity and inclusion initiatives in the workplace
  4. understand the legal framework regulating the management of workplace diversity and inclusion issues
  5. analyse practical case studies of inclusion, diversity and discrimination in the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Synopsis

This unit challenges students to think through the factors shaping how communities are governed in Australia and elsewhere as all societies grapple with the challenges of climate change, sustainability and the meaning of "progress". It develops knowledge and skills necessary for good governance applying United Nations Global Compact sustainability concepts. Students from Australian and other backgrounds share their experiences in various levels of government/intergovernmental, civil society (not for profit) and market (private business) sectors. It examines Integrated Governance i.e. the roles, relationships and networks of the levels and sectors in contemporary governance including how political systems work, democracy, the relationships between politicians and public servants, ethics, accountability, the importance of civil society and activity, and the role of the media.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of Integrated Governance and governance issues affecting nations, international regions and the global community
  2. identify the roles and dynamic relationships of the public sector, private sector and civil society in good governance
  3. create and develop ideas for reform of governance to meet particular policy objectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ramanie Samaratunge

Synopsis

The unit provides a comparative overview of international issues affecting public sector policy and management. Topics include the concept and impact of globalisation on international public policy and management; policy analysis and implementation in a changing world; management issues in international public administration and in developing countries; notions of development; and different strategies for development. Policy formulation and management practices in selected Asian countries are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the similarities and differences between public management, public policy and governance
  2. analyse the relationship between the public/intergovernmental, non-profit/community and corporate sectors at the international level
  3. explore the international and global dimensions of public policy, governance and management
  4. explain the similarities and differences between public policy, governance and management regimes in developed world and developing world settings
  5. analyse issues and problems in international public policy and management by means of Continental/regional and national case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Linda McGuire

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the practical application of strategic management concepts, theories and analytical techniques in the public sector. Public value, public accountability and public policy processes are fundamental differences that have practical implications for strategic management. Learning is structured around cases. The emphasis is on understanding the nature and complexity of strategy problems, the role of strategic analysis, and the application of frameworks and techniques to identify issues and evaluate options.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. identify and analyse the factors that influence strategy in public sector contexts
  2. select and apply appropriate frameworks and analytical techniques for strategic analysis in public sector contexts
  3. research and evaluate evidence for strategic analysis in public sector contexts
  4. evaluate strategic issues in a case and design appropriate recommendations for action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX9270, MGF5927, MPA5901or MPA9001 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Steve Perryman

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the theory and practice of policy analysis, the role of evidence in decision making and how policy analysis contributes to better policy outcomes.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. explain different theories and methods of policy analysis
  2. apply theories and methods of analysis to policy issues
  3. design strategies to address policy issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0028, 0200, 0201 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gabriele Buchholz

Synopsis

This unit studies financial resource allocation and management within the public sector. The focus is on the theory and practice of an integrated cycle of resource management used extensively in public sector planning, budgeting and resource allocation, performance management and reporting. The unit demonstrates the importance of integrating finance into an overall planning structure.

Outcomes

Our student will be able to:

  1. analyse the key elements of a 'performance-based' public sector financial management framework
  2. analyse key issues and trends in public sector financial management
  3. apply public sector financial management theory to evaluate current policies and practices
  4. evaluate the financial implications of policy objectives and competing priorities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX9270, MGF5927, MPA5901 or MPA9001 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Synopsis

Selected international studies covering issues of strategy and best practices in manufacturing and operations management. Students analyse the relevance of specific issues presented in the Australian context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop understanding on the basic concepts of operations strategies and operations management techniques of manufacturing companies in the global competition
  2. analyse the applications of operations management techniques in various situations
  3. develop problems solving skills for handling key operational issues from managerial perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dayna Simpson

Synopsis

This unit looks at innovation as a managerial process. It provides methodologies for setting up and managing innovation within teams, departments and organisation wide.
Topics cover: sources of innovation; collaboration and cooperation in innovation; types of innovation networks: social, sartorial, regional, national and global; the strategies and stages of creative innovation, translating knowledge into innovation; methods of selecting and rejecting innovation including the stage gate process; mapping technological change and opportunity; managing an innovative culture and the diffusion of innovation, exploiting intellectual property; the role of discontinuous innovation, and innovation for growth and sustainability in domestic and international markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop strategies for managing innovation and its commercialisation
  2. design an appropriate process for screening a new product service idea through to introduction
  3. define criteria for the sustainability of innovations
  4. describe the impact of networks and role of networking on managing the innovation process.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Julian Teicher

Synopsis

This unit examines national differences in work and employment practices, the historical, economic, political and cultural factors associated with these differences, and their implications for global business and other stakeholders, particularly in the Asia Pacific region. It assesses the impact of globalisation on work and employment in different national contexts, with a particular focus on the Asian economies. Topics include: internationalisation and global production systems, divergence and convergence in national systems of employment relations in European, Anglophone and Asian countries, labour management practices in multi-national enterprises, corporate social responsibility and labour standards, regulatory and institutional differences governing the management of labour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the globalisation of trade and production systems and the impact on employment relations and labour standards
  2. identify the implications of globalisation and financialisation for the management of labour in different national settings
  3. evaluate the work practices and labour standards in MNCs
  4. examine institutions governing trade and labour standards, including international labour standards, trade agreements, and corporate codes of conduct
  5. assess the relationship between trade and labour standards in industrialising and transition economies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 3844, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sandra Cockfield

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the principles of negotiation applied to various spheres of conflict and exchange, including work and employment relations, business and commercial conflicts, international trade and diplomacy. As well as providing an overview of key theoretical ideas, the unit draws on a wide range of bargaining exercises and simulations which allow students to place these concepts in practical negotiation situations. Topics include styles of conflict management and negotiation, negotiation strategies and situations, effective and ineffective negotiation tactics, understanding key processes and dynamics in negotiation, judgement and cognitive error in negotiations, multi-party negotiations, and the social context of negotiations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the common characteristics of conflict in a wide range of exchange relationships
  2. evaluate theoretical foundations for effective negotiation
  3. develop practical skills through application of concepts in negotiation exercises.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Cooney

Synopsis

The design of the business and its processes has become a key source of innovation and performance improvement. Innovative process design leads to the introduction of new business models, opening up new markets and new business opportunities. The redesign of existing processes leads to cost reductions and productivity improvements for the business. This unit introduces students to the use of design tools for innovation and improvement in business processes. It equips students to analyse and improve existing processes and to develop new business models and prototype new business processes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the use of process design tools
  2. analyse process improvement opportunities
  3. evaluate and apply differing approaches to process innovation
  4. evaluate project methodologies for process innovation and improvement
  5. identify and develop new business models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX5700


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Greg Bamber

Notes

It is strongly recommended that this unit be undertaken in the last semester of study for the Master of Business (Managing human capital specialisation).

Synopsis

Strategic human resource management and context; SHRM models; the HRM and organisational performance link; high performance work systems; managing the employment relationship; employee voice; ethics and social responsibility; international strategic HRM.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the relationship between people management and strategy
  2. critically analyse the strategic planning and implementation considerations associated with key areas of HRM strategy
  3. critically analyse the potential for human resource management to enhance competitive advantage, organisational performance and sustainability
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in strategic people management
  5. critically analyse strategic HRM theories and practices and their applications to organisational realities
  6. apply theories of people management and strategy to a practical work environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 24 credit points before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jagjit Plahe

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with insights into the role of emerging economies in a globalising world. Using a political economy approach, the unit will provide a comparative perspective on Brazil, Russia, China, India and South Africa also known as the BRICS. Over the past ten years the geo-political and economic importance of the BRICS has been increasing. While they have been advocating for a stronger voice in major international institutions such as the WTO, the World Bank and the IMF, the BRICS do not have a common identity and their influence and power at the global level is uneven. This unit covers the history of the BRICS as well as the political, economic, security and foreign policy trends in these countries. It provides different perspectives on the power of the BRICS in an international context and focuses on the challenges they face. Particular attention is given to the thematic areas of international trade, international finance, the environment, global health and food security.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the different theoretical perspectives on the rise of the BRICS
  2. explain the history of the BRICS covering domestic and foreign policy perspectives
  3. critically evaluate the influence of the BRICS in a globalising world.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jagjit Plahe

Synopsis

The unit will provide students with key insights regarding how trade policy is formulated, negotiated and implemented; the economic, social and cultural implications of international trade rules; the pattern of relationships that exists between trade policy and prosperity; and the implications of the global financial crisis for international trade policy. The unit focuses on the GATT/WTO System and Bilateral and Regional Trade Agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the advantages and limitations of the multilateral trading system in terms of its decision making processes and its agreements (agriculture, services, intellectual property, etc.)
  2. explain the recent surge of bilateralism and regionalism and assess the implications of this surge for the multilateral trading system
  3. evaluate the opportunities and the limitations of formally linking human rights and environmental issues to the global trading system
  4. judge whether the current global trading system treats trade liberalisation as a means to an end (the end being sustainable and equitable development) or an end in itself
  5. evaluate the implications of the global financial crisis for the global trading system.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Nicola Charwat

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed examination of the role played by international institutions and organisations in the process of global governance. The unit focuses on the intergovernmental sector (including regional institutions), the non-governmental sector and the multinational corporate sector. The unit is informed by the research traditions of international relations, international law, international political economy, global governance, global civil society studies, and international business. In examining the process of global governance the unit will cover the thematic areas of global trade and finance, global peace and security, human rights and the environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the theory and processes of global governance
  2. acquire an understanding of the purpose, motivations and strategies of the United Nations System, regional organisations, civil society and multinational corporations
  3. assess the roles of the intergovernmental, non-governmental and corporate sectors in shaping and influencing global governance
  4. analyse key issues and themes relating to international institutions and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Rod Sarah

Synopsis

This unit explores the systemic and interrelated nature of the modern organisation and its environment. It provides a strongly based theoretical framework for the understanding of these relationships and a set of skills and tools for their analysis. It provides practical experience in developing an understanding of internally developed dynamics and experience in the use of micro-world simulations for an understanding of dynamics of the external and policy-making environment. Finally, it provides an understanding of two powerful systems technologies for analysis and change in organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the interrelationships between the internal structures and dynamics of a business and those of its external environment
  2. develop an understanding of the tools of systems thinking and systems diagnosis and understand their application to improving managerial practice
  3. develop analytic and thinking skills for application and further development in other units of the Masters
  4. develop an understanding of intervention strategies that can be used to bring about organisational change.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Nyland

Synopsis

Foreign policy involves relationships with other governments over which little control is directly exercised. Diplomacy as the art of persuasion is therefore an integral part of foreign policy. Just as democracy has transformed the domestic political environment of many countries since the eighteenth century, self-determination has transformed the international political environment in the twentieth century. The two traditions in statecraft -- one moral and universalist, one pragmatic and promoting the 'national interest' -- are tested in the context of bilateral, regional and multilateral modern diplomacy. Case studies in the Asia-Pacific and the challenges facing foreign policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire the principles and practices of diplomacy, statecraft and international relations
  2. reason in an informed way regarding diplomacy and statecraft
  3. analyse and report on the international political and security environment
  4. read critically and construct a sophisticated argument in relation to questions of diplomacy and statecraft.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX9110


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Mayson

Synopsis

Introduction to the field of human resource management for students without managerial or supervisory experience or work experience. Topics include the purpose of HRM and its contribution to meeting organisational and employee needs; the strategic role of human resource management and the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage; HRM challenges faced by organisations in a global and competitive environment including attracting and retaining skilled staff, issues relating to diverse workforces, safety and wellbeing, performance and reward management in developing employee capabilities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define HRM and understand the purpose and the range of activities associated with the area of Human Resource Management (HRM)
  2. understand and differentiate between basic models of HRM
  3. understand and analyse the strategic contribution of the HR function and HR managers
  4. understand the global context and its effects on HRM
  5. examine a range of HR challenges faced by organisations and explain how the activities normally associated with HRM can address such issues
  6. critically engage with and apply HRM theory and empirical research published in current academic literature individually and in groups.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX9850, MGX5985, MGX9221


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand how the public policy process operates and the role of stakeholders in policy development. Public policy process theory is discussed in the light of specific cases, and related to a broad range of practitioner experience. Case studies in Australian public policy will be analysed within this course.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define a range of models and theories that help explain how public policy is made
  2. analyse the role of government institutions and processes in policy making
  3. analyse how governments engage with stakeholders in public policy processes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9230


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Synopsis

This unit examines management in the public sector in Australia and internationally and the impact of public sector reform. It considers theoretical explanations of reform and implementation in practice. The focus is on identifying and analysing practical issues facing public managers. Australia is considered an international leader in public sector reform and practical illustrations are drawn from Australian and international experience.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the theoretical foundations of public sector reforms
  2. evaluate the effectiveness of public sector reforms in practice
  3. identify and analyse the knowledge, skills and abilities required by contemporary public managers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9270


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Sen Sendjaya

Synopsis

This unit is an introductory overview of organisational leadership, with the aim of developing knowledge, skills and understanding of the multifaceted nature of organisational leadership in relation to work-relevant factors. Concepts and issues examined during the course of tuition include the nature of leadership; from management to leadership; traits, behaviours and relationships; contingency approaches; leadership vision and strategic direction; leadership communication; shaping culture and values; leading a learning organisation; motivation and empowerment; leading teams; leadership and multiculturalism; and leading change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an insight into and understanding of the differences between management and leadership in order to enhance leadership and research skills
  2. develop a better capacity to analyse and report on domestic and international issues directly related to organisational leadership both generically as well as within real-life workplaces
  3. acquire an overview of the voluminous research literature on leadership in order to better promote leadership development
  4. develop an awareness of the various constructs of leadership and their relevance to organisational effectiveness, change, and sustainability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX9280


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter O'Neill

Synopsis

E-business entails technical, managerial and business issues. In the last decade it has rapidly developed, and is now widely accepted by consumers, business partners, employees, the governments, banks and other business entities. After an overview of e-business development, technologies for e-business and different types of e-business models, this unit will focus on concepts, theories and issues associated with e-business management in the global market. This unit will enhance students' understanding of e-business, its impact on market place transformation and management approaches to e-business and related issues. This unit is based upon lectures, cases, and class discussions. This reflects the dynamic nature of the subject matter and our efforts to make certain that the material discussed in class is leading edge, up to date and in tune with what is going on in the area.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with a broad appreciation of e-business
  2. understand technology, business and management issues for e-business
  3. understand how organisations create value from e-business
  4. understand e-business managerial and strategic issues
  5. understand e-business leadership and change management requirements.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX9420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Julie Rayner

Synopsis

The unit considers emerging technological, social, economic, political and legal changes having implications for the successful management of people within the Australian context. Topics covered will alter as current issues change. Representative issues include implications of social, technological and demographic changes for HRM; philosophical orientations and ethics in HRM; the role of HRM in the strategy, development, implementation, and use of emerging technologies; alternative delivery models for HRM activities; workplace violence and bullying.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature of changes to the organisation of work in Australia
  2. identify strategies for HR professionals to manage the challenges posed by changes in the organisation of work for both individuals and organisations
  3. analyse emerging HR issues and associated challenges
  4. review possible HR responses to current issues
  5. critically analyse and apply HRM theory and empirical research to current HR issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX5985 or MGX9850

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sijun Shao

Synopsis

Students examine globalisation and assess its implications for the governance of the business enterprise, nation states and relations between business and government. The unit also examines the difficulties that globalisation creates for nations and multinational enterprises in both the emerging and developed world, the open market, and the policy responses proposed to balance economic, social and political costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify major political, economic and regulatory forces that underpin the globalisation process
  2. critically analyse how international political and economic developments are shaping the structure of global institutes
  3. evaluate how the globalisation of rules can become a source of competitive advantage for firms, governments and non-profit organisations
  4. identify solutions that would enhance the sovereignty of ordinary citizens over the globalisation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Alan Lawton

Synopsis

The interaction of external environment, organisational factors and strategic human resource management (SHRM) is examined from multiple perspectives. Topics may include strategic choices facing the organisation in the areas of business planning, building SHRM capabilities, transforming the HR function, and the SHRM program evaluation. The implications of SHRM for organisational performance are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the relationship between theories of strategic management and models of strategic HRM
  2. critically analyse the strategic planning and implementation considerations associated with key areas of HRM strategy
  3. critically analyse the potentials for human resource management to enhance competitive advantage, organisational performance and sustainability
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in strategic human resource management
  5. critically analyse strategic HRM theories and practices and their applications to organisational realities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

Prerequisites

MGX5985 or MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0028, 0200, 0201 or 1822.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Alan Lawton

Synopsis

This unit advances prior learning in the fields of international management and human resources management. The specific area of inquiry in international human resource management is the personnel function in the increasingly diverse and complex environment of internationalisation. Based on the premise that people are a source of competitive advantage for international organisations, this unit analyses the environment, role and function of international HRM.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of international human resource management (HRM)
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the differences between domestic and international HRM
  3. evaluate linkages between IHRM and business strategy
  4. analyse the relationship between business, government and labour internationally
  5. assess the role of IHRM at varying stages of internationalisation
  6. determine the relative costs and benefits of PCNs, HCNs and TCNs as international managers
  7. analyse IHRM functions and process in various international settings
  8. compare and contrast the value of utilising differing types of assignments (real and virtual) across projects and functions for international operations
  9. critically analyse literature/theories in IHRM with reference to practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX5985, MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Alan Lawton

Synopsis

This unit will involve a comprehensive examination of executive leadership in Australia and internationally. Students will study individual, group and organisational issues, specifically in terms of current and traditional leadership models and paradigms; gender, ethical, and strategic issues; and the relationships between leadership and performance, group dynamics, and organisational culture.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of leadership theories and research outcomes, and identify their applications to real-life situations
  2. describe and evaluate the principles and practices of management, their differences and similarities to leadership, and their relationship to leadership in an organisational setting
  3. evaluate the multifaceted nature of leadership in Australia and internationally, and enhance students' own leadership skills in the process
  4. evaluate the trends in and implications of leadership and management research in organisations and their impact on work environments
  5. critically analyse the development of leadership in relation to research outcomes and practical applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 3164, 2099, 1822, 1679, 3848, 2778, 1741 or seek approval from the Chief Examiner before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Damian Morgan

Synopsis

This unit focuses on enhancing students' understanding of problem solving and decision making processes in management practice, from a critical perspective on managerial thinking and action as an art of practical wisdom and sound judgment. Through interactive group work, role play, case studies and situational exercises, students will apply analytical reasoning and adaptive-creative methods of decision making to successfully manage organisational problems. Specific tools and techniques will be used to illustrate the complexity of managers' roles in defining problems; generating, evaluating and implementing solutions; balancing rationality and intuition; and making group decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret organisational phenomena effectively, in order to define problems and identify decision-making situations
  2. analyse patterns and relationships in problem solving and decision making processes
  3. identify and evaluate problem contexts, explanations and alternative solutions
  4. recognise and avoid errors in reasoning and decision-making
  5. identify implicit assumptions, constraints and biases in problem solving and decision making, and develop strategies to effectively communicate these to stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 3164, 2099, 1822, 1679, 3848, 2778, 1741 or seek approval from the Chief Examiner before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to services and operations management concepts. The unit introduces operations management concepts in delivering value to customers, within and across organisations. Furthermore, the unit introduces and investigates service management in a variety of industry contexts, including discretionary and non-discretionary services. The services and operations concepts are synthesised through applied assessment.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and distinguish between services and operations management principles and practices
  2. outline and apply operations management concepts in delivering value to customers
  3. apply and analyse discretionary and non-discretionary service management concepts
  4. synthesise services and operations management concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 3164, 2099, 1822, 1679, 3848, 2778, 1741 or seek the approval of the Chief Examiner before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sijun Shao

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the study of work and employment relations in a changing and dynamic environment. The unit aims to provide students with an understanding of the conceptual foundations of employment relations, the key elements of an industrial relations system, and the dynamics of employment relations in the Australian context. Topics covered include: the individual and the employment relationship, the structure and dynamic of labour markets, the management of employment relations in different industry and workplace contexts, the organisation of work, bargaining and conflict, the role of unions, institutions and the relation of employment relations, and the economic and social consequences of different national systems of employment relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the conceptual foundations of work and employment relations
  2. apply these concepts to developments within the Australian system of employment relations in comparative context
  3. describe the main institutional features and key developments in the Australian industrial and workplace relations system
  4. identify the implications of these developments for labour management practices, employee voice and participation in the workplace and representative organisations of employers and employees
  5. understand the potential effects of institutions governing work and employment relations using workplace and industry case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9220, MGX5920


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Philip Taylor

Synopsis

Individual behaviour in the organisation, including topics such as personality, perception, values and attitudes, socialisation and motivation. Group behaviour, including topics such as group structure and properties, group and team development, and leadership. Organisational analysis, including structure, design and culture. Organisational processes, including ethics and social responsibility, decision making, power and influence, stress and conflict management.

Outcomes

The learning outcomes associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and the range of activities associated with the effective management of people in organisations
  2. evaluate the importance of the individual, the team and the organisation's contribution to the effective performance of work
  3. analyse the relationship between the development of theory, behaviour in organisations and management practice
  4. assess the role of ethics and social responsibility in determining the culture of an organisation in the overall conduct of its business
  5. critically analyse and apply current management theory and research to current organisational issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 3164, 2099, 1822, 1679, 3848, 2778, 1741 or seek approval from the Chief Examiner before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MBA9008, MGX9600, MGX5960, MGG9370, MGG9600


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Philip Taylor

Synopsis

Examines change management from both theoretical and practical perspectives. Theory relating to employee responses to change and promoting readiness for change. Organisation Development including characteristics of OD, process models, role of the practitioner, interventions; Organisational transformation including nature and characteristics, models, strategic change leadership and capability.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the challenges and issues arising out of organisational change initiatives
  2. recall various change models and frameworks, their foundations and relative strengths and weaknesses
  3. apply change models and concepts to real-life organisational change
  4. identify the skills and abilities required to be an effective change agent
  5. develop reflective and evaluative skills as a change agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 3164, 2099, 1822, 1679, 3848, 2778, 1741 or seek approval from the Chief Examiner before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGX9720, MGX5972, MGG9720


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sijun Shao

Synopsis

Identification and evaluation of the firm's competitive position, its markets, government policies, social issues, emerging trends and key factors which are critical for success in its environment. The crafting of an appropriate strategy supported by structure, controls and rewards.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the dynamic nature of business and the strategic management processes employed by businesses to gain sustainable competitive advantage
  2. develop analytical skills to plan the future of an organisation in its competitive environment from the viewpoint of the Chief Executive
  3. identify the necessary skills for developing and implementing strategies that will enable the organisation to achieve competitive advantage and sustainability
  4. critically analyse the strategic management theories and practices to apply to organisational realities
  5. develop management skills and knowledge to examine strategic management challenges from strategy, change and learning perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 3164, 2099, 1822, 1679, 3848, 2778, 1741 or seek approval from the Chief Examiner before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGG9371, MGX9761, MGX5976, MGG9761


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mrs Candy White

Synopsis

Introduction to the field of human resource management. Topics include the strategic role of human resource management, the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage, job design, staffing, performance management, strategic compensation and reward systems, developing employee capabilities and assessment of HRM strategies and practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and the range of activities associated with the area of human resource management
  2. differentiate between models of personnel and HRM
  3. analyse and evaluate the strategic contribution that can be made by the HR function
  4. analyse and explain each of the activities normally associated with HRM
  5. evaluate the strategic impact of each of the HRM activity areas
  6. critically analyse and apply HRM theory and empirical research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9221, MGX9850, MGX5985, MGF5921


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Chew Yin Teng

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of multi-national corporations (MNC) activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance. Asian regional context will be central to the teaching pedagogy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for small medium enterprises (SMEs) and multinational organisations in a global setting, with increasing focus on the emerging economies
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and dangers involved in international strategic management
  4. evaluate the impact different types of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following; MGM5966, MGS5966, MGX9660, MGX5966, MGZ5966.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in the 2098 Master of International Business to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jane Tong

Synopsis

International strategic management; ethics and social responsibility, communication and interpersonal relations; employee attitudes and motivation; cross-cultural leadership; control and conflict issues, international human resource management and comparative industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the changing nature of international management process
  2. relate management theory to varying and different cultures
  3. describe and explain the complex challenges facing business and managers in a cross-cultural setting
  4. critically compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the international business management environment and understand their impact on international management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jane Tong

Synopsis

The unit looks at ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (e.g. ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGG5810, MGX5640, MGS5640, MGZ5640


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Synopsis

An understanding of major internationalisation theories and its practical implications on international firms; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX9660, MGS5966, MGX5966, MGZ5966


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
South Africa Trimester 1 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
South Africa Term 4 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor HB Klopper

Synopsis

Basic introduction to research design in management; types of research designs; qualitative and quantitative data collection and measurement techniques; coding data; reliability and validity; qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis; interpreting and discussing results; structuring and writing the research report; integrating individual research into overall management literature.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2015 (Evening)
South Africa MBA Teaching Period 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
South Africa Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Assoc Professor Ilse Niemann-Struweg

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of MNC activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations in a global setting, with increasing focus on the emerging economies
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and dangers involved in international strategic management
  4. evaluate the impact different types of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGM5966 or MGS5966 or MGX5966 or MGX9660 or MGZ5966

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Dina Burger

Synopsis

International strategic management; ethics and social responsibility, communication and interpersonal relations; employee attitudes and motivation; cross-cultural leadership; control and conflict issues, international human resource management and comparative industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the changing nature of international management processes
  2. relate management theory to varying and different cultures in the Southern African context
  3. describe and explain the complex challenges facing business and managers in a cross-cultural setting
  4. critically compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the international business management environment and explain their impact on international management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2015 (Evening)
South Africa Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ilse Niemann-Struweg

Synopsis

The unit looks at the ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings in the Southern African region. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (eg: ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ilse Niemann-Struweg

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; e.g.: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct a research project on a significant issue in the field management
  2. critically evaluate the extant literature based on the relevant research topic
  3. design and execute a research plan, identifying appropriate methodology contributing to the overall analysis
  4. critically analyse the findings in a major analytical report on the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students need to have achieved a minimum grade of 70% in MGS5000 and be granted permission before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Evening)
South Africa Term 3 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Assoc Professor Ilse Niemann-Struweg

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; e.g.: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students need to be granted permission before undertaking this unit and to have completed MGS5000 with a minimum grade of 70%, and 24 credit points of course work with an average grade of 70%.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Dina Burger

Synopsis

This unit looks at management implications of major internationalisation theories; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGM5966, MGX5966, MGZ5966, MGX9660


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Malaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Au Wee Chan (Malaysia); Dr Ross Donohue (Caulfield)

Synopsis

Basic introduction to research design in management; types of research designs; qualitative and quantitative data collection and measurement techniques; coding data; reliability and validity; qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis; interpreting and discussing results; structuring and writing the research report; integrating individual research into overall management literature.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter O'Neill

Synopsis

This core unit will provide students with a practical experience of the pathways that lead from scientific innovation to the creation of wealth. The unit is a research based unit in which students work alongside research scientists to explore the commercialisation potential of their scientific research. Students apply their knowledge from the business and law units to a relevant practical situation. Students will gain first hand experience in the wide range of roles involved in converting science to wealth at a personal, enterprise and economy wide level.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the separate stages in the commercialisation of scientific and technological research
  2. manage the process whereby scientists protect their intellectual property
  3. work with appropriate advisors to plan and manage processes to be undertaken to comply with regulatory requirements for the early stage commercialisation of a pharmaceutical , medical or technological device
  4. work with scientists or technology specialists, investors and appropriate advisors on the financial considerations for venture capital and financial planning pertaining to the commercialisation of a scientific or technology based project
  5. recognise the commercial potential of a scientific or technology based project that merits the protection of intellectual property and further commercialisation development
  6. work as a team member and interact with a range of peers and clients in a commercially sensitive environment
  7. critically analyse scientific data to determine commercial possibilities
  8. write a range of business reports such as business plans, technology assessments, marketing plans and patent applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3840 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

GSB5000


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter O'Neill

Synopsis

This core unit will examine the pathways that lead from scientific innovation to the creation of wealth. The unit will allow participants to conceptualise their possible roles in converting science to wealth at a personal, enterprise and economy wide level. A seminar series from experts in special fields of relevance (such as venture capitalists, scientist, entrepreneurs, financial analysts and financial planners) forms an important part of the unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the separate stages in the commercialisation of scientific research
  2. describe the steps required to protect scientific intellectual property
  3. state the legal structure and procedures involved in regulatory affairs
  4. describe the financial considerations for venture capital and financial planning pertaining to the commercialisation of a scientific project
  5. write a business plan relevant to the commercialisation of a scientific project
  6. participate as a team member to deliver an oral presentation on a commercial case study
  7. describe the role of science in the development of a modern society
  8. act with ethical and moral integrity in a commercial environment
  9. predict and appreciate the ethical issues raised by scientific research for local and international communities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3840 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

GSB5011


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Cristina Neesham

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students moral reasoning about the conduct of business in the global context. They will achieve this by exploring theories of ethics and justice in business and in its relationships with society, across different cultural and religious traditions; and reflecting on their own moral development through analysis of ethical and unethical behaviours in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the relationship between ethics, morals and values in the workplace
  2. explore different perspectives on moral development
  3. examine ethical theories to explain how they contribute to ethical business practices
  4. analyse some of the competing demands on business when scrutinising the ethics of business activity
  5. discuss the relationship between business practice, ethics and religion across different traditions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Michelle Greenwood (First semester); Dr Susan Mayson (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit analyses corporate social responsibility (CSR) from a range of different perspectives. The course is designed within a framework of understanding, applying and managing corporate social responsibility in business; CSR is considered in the context of the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment. Through the use of case studies of Australian and international companies, students will examine CSR challenges across a range of industry settings and develop strategies for responsible management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast the strengths and limitations of a range of models of corporate social responsibility
  2. examine the range of external and internal factors that impact on an organisation's corporate social responsibility
  3. analyse the major corporate social responsibilities of business, in particular within the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment in the context of globalisation
  4. identify the tensions between conflicting business and social responsibilities
  5. critique different managerial approaches to working with stakeholders to address issues of corporate social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood (First semester)
Dr Susan Mayson (Second semester)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Smith

Synopsis

The unit offers a general introduction to contemporary Asia, to regional problems and interactions and the relevant political, economic and other relationships, by identifying and discussing the major issues of the day and their illustration of significant regional themes. Discussion includes an analysis of relevant countries' history and culture as these affect issues and relationships.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and critically evaluate the key events and trends in socio-political, socio-economic and socio-cultural affairs in the separate nation states of contemporary Asia
  2. assess the impact on Australia of selected contemporary events in Asia
  3. investigate the nature of regional interactions and conflicts, based on a comparative analysis of the history, politics, economy and culture of individual countries
  4. examine Australia's role in the region through a focus on her bilateral and multilateral relationships in Asia
  5. select a disciplinary area of interest and conduct an individual research project on one aspect of contemporary affairs in a chosen Asian country.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Synopsis

This unit examines the social, economic and legal dimensions of diversity and inclusion. It aims to provide both theoretical and practical application of contemporary ideas to promote workplace diversity and inclusion. Topics include theoretical perspectives on diversity and inclusion, forms of diversity and inclusion, the legal dimensions of discrimination, the legal framework regulating diversity, inclusion, discrimination and EEO, the strategic business, HRM and employment relations issues associated with promoting diversity and inclusion, the state of workplace diversity in the Australian context, contemporary public policy issues and diversity and inclusion in a comparative context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts of diversity and inclusion applied to the workplace
  2. evaluate the legal, ethical, and professional issues associated with diversity management in the contemporary workplace
  3. identify the strategic business, HRM and employment relations issues associated with developing and implementing diversity and inclusion initiatives in the workplace
  4. understand the legal framework regulating the management of workplace diversity and inclusion issues
  5. analyse practical case studies of inclusion, diversity and discrimination in the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Audra Mockaitis

Synopsis

Issues include the impact of culture on management and the convergence-divergence debate; centralisation versus decentralisation of decision making; standardisation versus differentiation of management activities; control versus delegation; and, competition versus partnership: new international organisation forms and implications for management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the issues relating to global-local dilemma confronting multinational enterprises
  2. analyse the issues relating to multinational production systems and their impact on management practices
  3. develop skills to examine the global supply chain and quality management practices pursued by multinational enterprises
  4. Identify the attributes that successful multinational managers should have to meet and beat the challenges of managing stakeholders
  5. define the theoretical and conceptual frameworks underlying particular issues in international management
  6. critically analyse the multinational management practices, and apply them to case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX9660 or MGX5966

Co-requisites

Students should study this unit in the final year of their course.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Lindsay (First Semester); Mr Max Coulthard (Second Semester)

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of MNC activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations in a global setting
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and dangers involved in international strategic management
  4. evaluate the impact different types of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sarah Lindsay (First Semester)
Mr Max Coulthard (Second Semester)

Prerequisites

MGX9660 or MGX5966

Co-requisites

It is recommended that students take this unit in the final year of their course


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Anne Bardoel

Synopsis

The purpose of this unit is to examine and debate the critical challenges facing individuals, families, and employers in managing work, family and life. It seeks to identify linkages between individuals, families, work environments, and society by studying the research that explores this interdependence. Implications of a number of radical changes (eg: increasing demographic and cultural diversity, greater emphasis on lifestyle balance by employed men and women, and changes in the way work is structured) on these linkages will be examined. Topics studied include work-family conflict, organisational work-life policies and programs, legal and business issues concerning work-life.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the separation of work, family and personal life from a historical perspective
  2. identify the social and demographic changes of recent decades that have altered the once established dynamics of work, family and personal life
  3. analyse how gender, class, and culture affects work/life linkages
  4. identify the issues regarding the business and legal case for work-life initiatives
  5. identify and analyse workplace and government policy initiatives aimed at helping individuals manage work, family and life roles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MGF5921, MGX9221, MGX5960, MGX9600, MGX5962, MGX9602, MGX5985, MGX9850, MGF5300 or MGX5300. Otherwise Chief Examiner's approval is required.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Holland (Caulfield); Dr Julie Rayner (Gippsland)

Synopsis

The unit considers emerging technological, social, economic, political and legal changes having implications for the successful management of people within the Australian context. Topics covered will alter as current issues change. Representative issues include implications of social, technological and demographic changes for HRM; philosophical orientations and ethics in HRM; the role of HRM in the strategy, development, implementation, and use of emerging technologies; alternative delivery models for HRM activities; workplace violence and bullying.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature of changes to the organisation of work in Australia
  2. identify strategies for HR professionals to manage the challenges posed by changes in the organisation of work for both individuals and organisations
  3. analyse emerging HR issues and associated challenges
  4. review possible HR responses to current issues
  5. critically analyse and apply HRM theory and empirical research to current HR issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX5985 or MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Synopsis

This unit challenges students to think through the factors shaping how communities are governed in Australia and elsewhere as all societies grapple with the challenges of climate change, sustainability and the meaning of "progress". It develops knowledge and skills necessary for good governance applying United Nations Global Compact sustainability concepts. Students from Australian and other backgrounds share their experiences in various levels of government/intergovernmental, civil society (not for profit) and market (private business) sectors. It examines Integrated Governance i.e. the roles, relationships and networks of the levels and sectors in contemporary governance including how political systems work, democracy, the relationships between politicians and public servants, ethics, accountability, the importance of civil society and activity, and the role of the media.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. explain the concept of Integrated Governance and governance issues affecting nations, international regions and the global community
  2. identify the roles and dynamic relationships of the public sector, private sector and civil society in good governance
  3. create and develop ideas for reform of governance to meet particular policy objectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Cherrie Zhu (First semester); Associate Professor Audra Mockaitis (Second semester)

Synopsis

International strategic management; ethics and social responsibility, communication and interpersonal relations; employee attitudes and motivation; cross-cultural leadership; control and conflict issues, international human resource management and comparative industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the changing nature of international management process
  2. relate management theory to varying and different cultures
  3. describe and explain the complex challenges facing business and managers in a cross-cultural setting
  4. critically compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the international business management environment and understand their impact on international management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Cherrie Zhu (First semester)
Associate Professor Audra Mockaitis (Second semester)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Ramanie Samaratunge

Synopsis

The unit provides a comparative overview of international issues affecting public sector policy and management. Topics include the concept and impact of globalisation on international public policy and management; policy analysis and implementation in a changing world; management issues in international public administration and in developing countries; notions of development; and different strategies for development. Policy formulation and management practices in selected Asian countries are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the similarities and differences between public management, public policy and governance
  2. analyse the relationship between the public/intergovernmental, non-profit/community and corporate sectors at the international level
  3. explore the international and global dimensions of public policy, governance and management
  4. explain the similarities and differences between public policy, governance and management regimes in developed world and developing world settings
  5. analyse issues and problems in international public policy and management by means of Continental/regional and national case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Linda McGuire

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the practical application of strategic management concepts, theories and analytical techniques in the public sector. Public value, public accountability and public policy processes are fundamental differences that have practical implications for strategic management. Learning is structured around cases. The emphasis is on understanding the nature and complexity of strategy problems, the role of strategic analysis, and the application of frameworks and techniques to identify issues and evaluate options.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. Identify and analyse the factors that influence strategy in public sector contexts
  2. Select and apply appropriate frameworks and analytical techniques for strategic analysis in public sector contexts
  3. Research and evaluate evidence for strategic analysis in public sector contexts
  4. Evaluate strategic issues in a case and design appropriate recommendations for action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 and must have passed MGF5927, MGX9270, MPA5901 or MPA9001 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the theory and practice of policy analysis, the role of evidence in decision making and how policy analysis contributes to better policy outcomes.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. explain different theories and methods of policy analysis
  2. apply theories and methods of analysis to policy issues
  3. design strategies to address policy issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0028, 0200, 0201 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Sourin Chakravorty

Synopsis

This unit studies financial resource allocation and management within the public sector. The focus is on the theory and practice of an integrated cycle of resource management used extensively in public sector planning, budgeting and resource allocation, performance management and reporting. The unit demonstrates the importance of integrating finance into an overall planning structure.

Outcomes

Our student will be able to:

  1. analyse the key elements of a 'performance-based' public sector financial management framework
  2. analyse key issues and trends in public sector financial management
  3. apply public sector financial management theory to evaluate current policies and practices
  4. evaluate the financial implications of policy objectives and competing priorities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 and must have passed MGF5927, MGX9270, MPA5901 or MPA9001 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Synopsis

Students examine globalisation and assess its implications for the governance of the business enterprise, nation states, and relations between business and government. The unit also examines the difficulties that globalisation creates for nations and multinational enterprises in both the emerging and developed world, the open markets, and the policy responses proposed to balance economic, social and political costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify major political, economic and regulatory forces that underpin the globalisation process
  2. critically analyse how international political and economic developments are shaping the structure of global institutions
  3. evaluate how the globalisation of rules can become a source of competitive advantage for firms, governments and non profit organisations
  4. identify solutions that would enhance the sovereignty of ordinary citizens over the globalisation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Synopsis

Selected international studies covering issues of strategy and best practices in manufacturing and operations management. Students analyse the relevance of specific issues presented in the Australian context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop understanding on the basic concepts of operations strategies and operations management techniques of manufacturing companies in the global competition
  2. analyse the applications of operations management techniques in various situations
  3. develop problems solving skills for handling key operational issues from managerial perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Rod Sarah

Synopsis

Organisations as open learning systems in turbulent environments; introduction to learning at the individual, group, organisational (inter-organisational and community levels); the concepts of organisational learning and learning theories, models, techniques and practices of the learning organisation; leadership, culture and organisational learning; case studies and action learning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of organisations as knowledge based learning systems, including having an understanding of various contemporary learning and knowledge management issues, influences, models and theories
  2. combine systems thinking and other approaches to describe, analyse and compare various models of organisational learning and knowledge management (OL&KM) and the way learning, knowledge and systems approaches inter relate
  3. design a practically useful, theory based, model of an ideal organisational learning and knowledge management (OL&KM) system
  4. examine and evaluate an existing organisation's OL&KM activities from the perspective of the model developed and their impact on organisational strategy and success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Greg Bamber

Synopsis

The interaction of external environment, organisational factors and strategic human resource management (SHRM) is examined from multiple perspectives. Topics may include strategic choices facing the organisation in the areas of business planning, building SHRM capabilities, transforming the HR function, and SHRM program evaluation. The implications of SHRM for organisational performance are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the relationship between theories of strategic management and models of strategic HRM
  2. critically analyse the strategic planning and implementation considerations associated with key areas of HRM strategy
  3. critically analyse the potential for human resource management to enhance competitive advantage, organisational performance and sustainability
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in strategic human resource management
  5. critically analyse strategic HRM theories and practices and their applications to organisational realities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX5985 or MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0028, 0200, 0201 or 1822


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Ananya Bhattacharya

Synopsis

This unit looks at innovation as a managerial process. It provides methodologies for setting up and managing innovation within teams, departments and organisation wide.
Topics cover: sources of innovation; collaboration and cooperation in innovation; types of innovation networks: social, sartorial, regional, national and global; the strategies and stages of creative innovation, translating knowledge into innovation; methods of selecting and rejecting innovation including the stage gate process; mapping technological change and opportunity; managing an innovative culture and the diffusion of innovation, exploiting intellectual property; the role of discontinuous innovation, and innovation for growth and sustainability in domestic and international markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop strategies for managing innovation and its commercialisation
  2. design an appropriate process for screening a new product service idea through to introduction
  3. define criteria for the sustainability of innovations
  4. describe the impact of networks and role of networking on managing the innovation process.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrea North-Samardzic

Synopsis

This unit examines national differences in work and employment practices, the historical, economic, political and cultural factors associated with these differences, and their implications for global business and other stakeholders, particularly in the Asia Pacific region. It assesses the impact of globalisation on work and employment in different national contexts, with a particular focus on the Asian economies. Topics include: internationalisation and global production systems, divergence and convergence in national systems of employment relations in European, Anglophone and Asian countries, labour management practices in multi-national enterprises, corporate social responsibility and labour standards, regulatory and institutional differences governing the management of labour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the globalisation of trade and production systems and the impact on employment relations and labour standards
  2. identify the implications of globalisation and financialisation for the management of labour in different national settings
  3. evaluate the work practices and labour standards in MNCs
  4. examine institutions governing trade and labour standards, including international labour standards, trade agreements, and corporate codes of conduct
  5. assess the relationship between trade and labour standards in industrialising and transition economies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Professor Amrik Sohal

Synopsis

This unit is designed to expose students to contemporary thought and practice in logistics and supply chain management. The unit will elaborate on the extension of logistics management across organisational boundaries. How organisations are using logistics and supply chain management as a competitive tool will also be covered. Students will be able to gain appreciation through the critical study of contemporary research publications in the area. The practice of leading edge organisations will also be studied. Students will have the opportunity to apply new concepts in case studies and in their own organisations through assignment work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain in detail the elements of integrated supply chain management
  2. critically evaluate contemporary literature in the field of logistics and supply chain management
  3. apply contemporary logistics and supply chain management concepts to an organisation
  4. formulate logistics and supply chain strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Belinda Allen

Synopsis

This unit examines principles used in pay determination in Australia and internationally, and provides a practical foundation to understanding how the design of systems of pay (and other extrinsic rewards) and participation (and other forms of intrinsic reward associated with work) can enhance individual and organisational performance. Topics include pays systems, forms of employee participation including financial participation (eg: share ownership), participation in work allocation (autonomous teams) and other forms of involvement in decision making in the workplace (eg: workplace democracy), performance management and motivation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the effectiveness of various approaches to employee participation, reward management and performance management
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the economic, legal, social and cultural issues associated with employee participation and reward and performance systems
  3. identify and apply innovations in pay and participation practices
  4. analyse relationships between individual performance, employee participation and a variety of reward systems that seek to promote organisational performance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Sandra Cockfield

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the principles of negotiation applied to various spheres of conflict and exchange, including work and employment relations, business and commercial conflicts, international trade and diplomacy. As well as providing an overview of key theoretical ideas, the unit draws on a wide range of bargaining exercises and simulations which allow students to place these concepts in practical negotiation situations. Topics include styles of conflict management and negotiation, negotiation strategies and situations, effective and ineffective negotiation tactics, understanding key processes and dynamics in negotiation, judgement and cognitive error in negotiations, multi-party negotiations, and the social context of negotiations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the common characteristics of conflict in a wide range of exchange

relationships

  1. evaluate theoretical foundations for effective negotiation
  2. develop practical skills through application of concepts in negotiation exercises.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Audra Mockaitis

Synopsis

This unit advances prior learning in the fields of international management and human resource management. The specific area of inquiry in international human resource management is the personnel function in the increasingly diverse and complex environment of internationalisation. Based on the premise that people are a source of competitive advantage for international organisations, this unit analyses the environment, role and function of international HRM.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of international human resource management (IHRM)
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the differences between domestic and international HRM
  3. evaluate linkages between IHRM and business strategy
  4. analyse the relationship between business, government and labour internationally
  5. assess the role of IHRM at varying stages of internationalisation
  6. determine the relative costs and benefits of PCNs, HCNs and TCNs as international managers
  7. analyse IHRM functions and process in various international settings
  8. compare and contrast the value of utilising differing types of assignments (real and virtual) across projects and functions for international operations
  9. critically analyse literature/theories in IHRM with reference to practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX5985, MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alex Newman

Synopsis

The unit looks at the ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (eg: ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGG5810


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Kalfadellis and Dr Cristina Neesham

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the EU business practices in the context of EU economic, social and employment policy. In this unit, EU business regulation and practice is related to issues of trade and foreign investment, common agricultural policy, monetary policy and the euro. European social models are discussed in relation to labour policies, welfare systems and social insurance policies as they affect the business environment in Europe. Contemporary issues such as globalisation, EU enlargement, EU integration and EU relations with Australia will also be examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase awareness of the European Union
  2. interpret information and research on debates around the impact of social policy (e.g. the European social model/s) on economic performance and social progress
  3. analyse the key priorities and structural elements of business regulation in the EU
  4. explain the benefits and challenges of the existing economic and social policies in the EU
  5. understand the inter-relationships between the EU and the rest of the world.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Loretta Inglis

Synopsis

This unit will involve a comprehensive examination of executive leadership in Australia and internationally. Students will study individual, group and organisational issues, specifically in terms of current and traditional leadership models and paradigms; gender, ethical, and strategic issues; and the relationships between leadership and performance, group dynamics, and organisational culture.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of leadership theories and research outcomes, and identify their applications to real-life situations
  2. describe and evaluate the principles and practices of management, their differences and similarities to leadership, and their relationship to leadership in an organisational setting
  3. evaluate the multifaceted nature of leadership in Australia and internationally, and enhance students' own leadership skills in the process
  4. evaluate the trends in and implications of leadership and management research in organisations and their impact on work environments
  5. critically analyse the development of leadership in relation to research outcomes and practical applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028, 3783, 4057 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Robyn Cochrane

Synopsis

This unit focuses on enhancing students' understanding of problem solving and decision making processes in management practice, from a critical perspective on managerial thinking and action as an art of practical wisdom and sound judgment.
Through interactive group work, role play, case studies and situational exercises, students will apply analytical reasoning and adaptive-creative methods of decision making to successfully manage organisational problems. Specific tools and techniques will be used to illustrate the complexity of managers' roles in defining problems; generating, evaluating and implementing solutions; balancing rationality and intuition; and making group decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret organisational phenomena effectively, in order to define problems and identify decision-making situations
  2. analyse patterns and relationships in problem solving and decision making processes
  3. identify and evaluate problem contexts, explanations and alternative solutions
  4. recognise and avoid errors in reasoning and decision-making
  5. identify implicit assumptions, constraints and biases in problem solving and decision making, and develop strategies to effectively communicate these to stakeholders.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dayna Simpson

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to services and operations management concepts. The unit introduces operations management concepts in delivering value to customers, within and across organisations. Furthermore, the unit introduces and investigates service management in a variety of industry contexts, including discretionary and non-discretionary services. The services and operations concepts are synthesised through applied assessment.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and distinguish between services and operations management principles and practices
  2. outline and apply operations management concepts in delivering value to customers
  3. apply and analyse discretionary and non-discretionary service management concepts
  4. synthesise services and operations management concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028, 1822, 3844 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dayna Simpson

Synopsis

This unit integrates concepts from both operations and supply chain management toward strategic goals of more sustainable production systems. By combining recent theory and practical examples, this unit provides students with tools that allow companies to reduce their overall resource use, manage their social and environmental risks at the extended enterprise level and design products and processes toward sustainable resource use. Specific topics include management systems for risk reduction and compliance, sustainable transport and distribution, closed-loop issues, mid-tier value chains, extended enterprise issues (e.g. certification and monitoring of suppliers), supplier development, technology protection and ethics. Topics are addressed from predominantly design and behavioural perspectives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the environmental and social implications of global production and distribution
  2. recognise and implement more sustainable design in processes and products
  3. understand the implications of sustainability for organisational survival and the role that operations plays in facilitating sustainability
  4. understand the technological and behavioural dimensions of sustainable process and product innovation
  5. understand the application of these dimensions in local, regional and global supply chains.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Nyland

Synopsis

Contemporary international issues are examined, with emphasis on the continuing dominance of economic issues but noting the rise in cultural and religious tensions and the search for new concepts of security. The phenomenon of 'failed societies' and the response of the United States as the sole surviving superpower of international problems in the post-Cold War era provide a theme.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify key issues, institutions and ideas that shape the environment in which diplomacy and international trade are conducted
  2. assess the key dynamics and trends in these issues and ideas
  3. develop critical reasoning and analytical skills for analysis of the international environment
  4. be able to put contemporary events in the social, political and economic context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Jagjit Plahe

Synopsis

The unit will provide students with key insights regarding how trade policy is formulated, negotiated and implemented; the economic, social and cultural implications of international trade rules; the pattern of relationships that exists between trade policy and prosperity; and the implications of the global financial crisis for international trade policy. The unit focuses on the GATT/WTO System and Bilateral and Regional Trade Agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the advantages and limitations of the multilateral trading system in terms of its decision making processes and its agreements (agriculture, services, intellectual property, etc.)
  2. explain the recent surge of bilateralism and regionalism and assess the implications of this surge for the multilateral trading system
  3. evaluate the opportunities and the limitations of formally linking human rights and environmental issues to the global trading system
  4. judge whether the current global trading system treats trade liberalisation as a means to an end (the end being sustainable and equitable development) or an end in itself
  5. evaluate the implications of the global financial crisis for the global trading system.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Jagjit Plahe

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed examination of the role played by international institutions and organisations in the process of global governance. The unit focuses on the intergovernmental sector (including regional institutions), the non-governmental sector and the multinational corporate sector. The unit is informed by the research traditions of international relations, international law, international political economy, global governance, global civil society studies, and international business. In examining the process of global governance the unit will cover the thematic areas of global trade and finance, global peace and security, human rights and the environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the theory and processes of global governance
  2. acquire an understanding of the purpose, motivations and strategies of the United Nations System, regional organisations, civil society and multinational corporations
  3. assess the roles of the intergovernmental, non-governmental and corporate sectors in shaping and influencing global governance
  4. analyse key issues and themes relating to international institutions and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Stephen Perryman

Synopsis

This unit analyses the relationship between government and business in a number of countries, but with a special focus upon Australia, the US and Japan. It examines the directions of this relationship, particularly in the context of globalisation.

The unit has three key objectives:

  1. to explore the relationship that exists between business and government, and the impact that the activities of one sector have on the operation of the other
  2. to examine approaches open to business organisations and to government to influence or direct the policy decisions of either sector
  3. to consider future directions that the business/government interface may take.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the relationship between the public and private sectors and the impact that the decisions and actions of one sector have on the operation of the other
  2. explain the theoretical basis, range and applications of formal and informal instruments regulating business and affecting self-regulation
  3. examine the approaches open to business organisations and to government to influence or direct the policy decisions of each sector
  4. critically evaluate alternative structures and future directions that the business/ government interface may take.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Rod Sarah

Synopsis

This unit explores the systemic and interrelated nature of the modern organisation and its environment. It provides a strongly based theoretical framework for the understanding of these relationships and a set of skills and tools for their analysis. It provides practical experience in developing an understanding of internally developed dynamics and experience in the use of micro-world simulations for an understanding of dynamics of the external and policy-making environment. Finally, it provides an understanding of two powerful systems technologies for analysis and change in organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the interrelationships between the internal structures and dynamics of a business and those of its external environment
  2. develop an understanding of the tools of systems thinking and systems diagnosis and understand their application to improving managerial practice
  3. develop analytic and thinking skills for application and further development in other units of the Masters
  4. develop an understanding of intervention strategies that can be used to bring about organisational change.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedMalaysia Summer semester B 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jane Tong and Mr Nicholas Grigoriou

Synopsis

This program aims to provide an opportunity for students to experience the diversity of contexts for doing business in Asia. The program will focus on the influence of diverse cultures, politics, institutions and local practices, and their impact on business decisions and managerial behaviour in Asia. The two-week program comprises on- and off- campus seminars and company visits in two or more Asian countries. The program will take students to meet with business and government leaders, conduct company visits and discuss business practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the cultural, political, and institutional issues that influence the business activities in the selected countries
  2. critically analyse the impact of the cultural, political and other institutional influence on company's strategic decisions as well as other management practices
  3. apply the basic theories and concepts in managing multinational firms in the international companies we tour and analyse both congruency and discrepancy between theories and real practices.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Malaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Donohue

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; eg: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct a research project on a significant issue in the field management
  2. critically evaluate the extant literature based on the relevant research topic
  3. design and execute a research plan, identifying appropriate methodology contributing to the overall analysis
  4. critically analyse the findings in a major analytical report on the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students need to have achieved a minimum grade of 70% in MGX5901 and be granted permission before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Malaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Donohue

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; eg: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a research project on a significant issue in the field management
  2. identify and critically evaluate relevant literature on the research topic
  3. identify and critically evaluate an appropriate methodology for the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students need to be granted permission before undertaking this unit and to have completed MGX5000 with a minimum grade of 70%, and 24 credit points of course work with an average grade of 70%.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Marjorie Jerrard (Caulfield); Dr Sijun Shao (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the study of work and employment relations in a changing and dynamic environment. The unit aims to provide students with an understanding of the conceptual foundations of employment relations, the key elements of an industrial relations system, and the dynamics of employment relations in the Australian context. Topics covered include: the individual and the employment relationship, the structure and dynamic of labour markets, the management of employment relations in different industry and workplace contexts, the organisation of work, bargaining and conflict, the role of unions, institutions and the relation of employment relations, and the economic and social consequences of different national systems of employment relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the conceptual foundations of work and employment relations
  2. apply these concepts to developments within the Australian system of employment relations in comparative context
  3. describe the main institutional features and key developments in the Australian industrial and workplace relations system
  4. identify the implications of these developments for labour management practices, employee voice and participation in the workplace and representative organisations of employers and employees
  5. understand the potential effects of institutions governing work and employment relations using workplace and industry case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9220


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Holland

Synopsis

This unit offers a broad perspective on the development of human resources within organisations by examining the role of training and development and career development within the Human Resource Management function of a business enterprise. It examines major theories relevant to human resource development and career development, including human capital theory, the theory of the psychological contract and the theory of the learning organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the strategic importance of human resource development (HRD) in the success of organisations
  2. assess this importance within the context of environmental pressures and government policy
  3. integrate an understanding of the nature and importance of theories of learning into the development of HRD programs
  4. critically assess the methods of identifying HRD needs from formulation through to evaluation
  5. explain and apply models of career management
  6. integrate emerging HRD themes into HRD strategies for achieving organisational objectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX5985, MGX9850, MGF5921 or MGX9221


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anderson (First Semester); Ms Barbara Heilemann (Second Semester)

Synopsis

Individual behaviour in the organisation, including topics such as personality, perception, values and attitudes, socialisation and motivation. Group behaviour, including topics such as group structure and properties, group and team development, and leadership. Organisational analysis, including structure, design and culture. Organisational processes, including ethics and social responsibility, decision making, power and influence, stress and conflict management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and the range of activities associated with the effective management of people in organisations
  2. evaluate the importance of the individual, the team and the organisation's contribution to the effective performance of work
  3. analyse the relationship between the development of theory, behaviour in organisations and management practice
  4. assess the role of ethics and social responsibility in determining the culture of an organisation in the overall conduct of its business
  5. critically analyse and apply current management theory and research to current organisational issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mary Anderson (First Semester)
Associate Professor Anne Bardoel (Second Semester)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 2099, 2778, 1065, 2643, or 0028 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MBA9008, MGG9370, MGG9600, MGG5960, MGX9602, MGX5962, MGX9600 and students enrolled in course code 3844.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ananya Bhattacharya

Synopsis

Topics include supply chains and logistics; trade offs and total system approach; channel structure, function and design; postponement-speculation; selecting channel members; administrative patterns in channels, the evolution of vertical marketing systems; bases of power; channel leadership; conflict in distribution channels; customer service; pre-post and transaction elements; order cycle factors; product availability; costs of service; customer service policy making; service measurement and standards; Parasuraman gap model; performance measurement; direct product profitability; distribution cost analysis; strategic profit model; supply management as an integral part of logistics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the strategic and operational perspectives of logistics
  2. describe the elements of the logistics mix and explain the trade offs between these elements
  3. discuss the mechanisms and issues involved in supply chain integration
  4. analyse the performance of logistics and the supply chain management in an organisation
  5. apply the concept of integrated logistics and supply chain management to solve an organisational problem.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGX9610


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anderson (First Semester); Dr Mulyadi Robin (Second Semester)

Notes

This unit is limited to students with no work experience.

Synopsis

The overall aim of this unit is to introduce pre-experience students to the range of activities associated with the management of individuals, groups and the organisation. In order to achieve this aim the content will cover several key areas of management. For example, the current challenges facing managers in a turbulent environment, the role of the individual, the importance of teamwork, managing conflict and effective decision making. Finally the role of corporate culture and ethics. Students undertaking this unit should expect to experience a variety of activities in order to challenge the content as prescribed above. These activities will include interactive case studies and application of the theory to 'real' world examples through group presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply current management theory and research to current organisational issues
  2. understand the personal challenges involved in becoming a new manager in an organisation in today's world
  3. understand the importance of the individual, the team and the organisation's contribution to the effective performance of work
  4. assess the role of ethics and social responsibility in determining the culture of an organisation
  5. identify techniques for improving decision making in today's turbulent environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mary Anderson (First Semester)
Dr Mulyadi Robin (Second Semester)

Co-requisites

Students enrolled in courses 1679, 2098, 2643, 3844 or 3848.

Prohibitions

MGX9600, MGX5960, MGG9600, MGG5960, MGX9602 and students enrolled in course 0105, 2099, 2778, 1065 or 0028.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Quamrul Alam

Synopsis

Management implications of major internationalisation theories; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MGM5966, MGS5966, MGX9660, MGZ5966


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tui McKeown

Synopsis

Examines change management from both theoretical and practical perspectives. Theory relating to employee responses to change and promoting readiness for change. Organisation Development -- characteristics of OD, process models, role of the practitioner, interventions; Organisational transformation -- nature and characteristics, models, strategic change leadership and capability.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the challenges and issues arising out of organisational change initiatives
  2. recall various change models and frameworks, their foundations and relative strengths and weaknesses
  3. apply change models and concepts to real-life organisational change
  4. identify the skills and abilities required to be an effective change agent
  5. develop reflective and evaluative skills as a change agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX9600, MGX5960, MGG5960, MGG9600 or MGG9370 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0028, 3844 or 1822

Prohibitions

MGX9720


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Nell Kimberley

Notes

This unit is limited to students with no work experience.

Synopsis

The overall aim of this unit is to introduce pre-experience students to the context and various perspectives in relation to the management of organisational change. In order to achieve this aim the content will cover several key areas of change management, such as models and frameworks of change; the role of the change agent; change implementation; understanding the impact of change on key stakeholder groups and their likely responses to change; stakeholder communication; contemporary approaches to managing change. Students undertaking this unit should expect to experience a variety of activities in order to challenge the content as prescribed above. These activities will, in the main, include interactive case studies and the application of change theory through group presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the challenges and issues arising out of organisational change initiatives
  2. recall various change models and frameworks, their foundations and relative strengths and weaknesses
  3. apply change models and concepts to real-life organisational change
  4. identify the skills and abilities required to be an effective change agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

MGX9602 or MGX5962

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3844, 2098 or 2643 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9720, MGX5972, MGG9720, MGG5972 AND students enrolled in any of the following courses are prohibited: 0105, 2099, 2778, 1065 and 0028.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Andrew Laurence Cavanagh

Synopsis

Identification and evaluation of the firm's competitive position, its markets, government policies, social issues, emerging trends and key factors which are critical for success in its environment. The crafting of an appropriate strategy supported by structure, controls and rewards.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the dynamic nature of business and the strategic management processes employed by businesses to gain sustainable competitive advantage
  2. develop analytical skills to plan the future of an organisation in its competitive environment from the viewpoint of the chief executive
  3. identify the necessary skills for developing and implementing strategies that will enable the organisation to achieve competitive advantage and sustainability
  4. critically analyse the strategic management theories and practices to apply to organisational realities
  5. develop management skills and knowledge to examine strategic management challenges from strategy, change and learning perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MGX9600, MGX5960 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822.

Prohibitions

MGG9371, MGG9761, MGX9761


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Peter Holland

Synopsis

Introduction to the field of human resource management. Topics include the strategic role of human resource management, the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage, job design, staffing, performance management, strategic compensation and reward systems, developing employee capabilities and assessment of HRM strategies and practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and the range of activities associated with the area of Human Resource Management (HRM)
  2. differentiate between models of Personnel and HRM
  3. analyse and evaluate the strategic contribution that can be made by the HR function
  4. analyse and explain each of the activities normally associated with HRM
  5. evaluate the strategic impact of each of the HRM activity areas
  6. critically analyse and apply HRM theory and empirical research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822, or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9221, MGF5921, MGX9850


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kohyar Kiazad

Synopsis

In this unit you will explore the main issues associated with communication and critical thinking in organisations, and the factors affecting effectiveness in these areas in a workplace environment. The unit addresses interpersonal communication skills, and examines theory and practice with regard to maintaining effective interpersonal relationships. You will also learn how to improve clarity in thinking and communication by using critical thinking and reasoning skills, to enhance the persuasive quality of arguments required in business communication.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop students core knowledge of the underpinnings of effective interpersonal communication and critical thinking
  2. broaden and advance students interpersonal communication skills, such as active listening, non-verbal communication, oral presentations, conflict resolution, and negotiation
  3. broaden and advance students critical thinking skills, such as decision making, structured thinking, and the evaluation of evidence and language
  4. guide students in an exploration of their communication and critical thinking strengths and weaknesses through reflective learning
  5. develop students ability to synthesise and apply learning to address complex organisational problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MBA9053, GSB9001 and MGX9001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jun Gu (First semester); Ms Lara Tolentino (Second semester)

Synopsis

This unit draws strongly on the expanding fields of positive psychology and positive organisational scholarship, to provide students with a sound practical, theoretical and empirical grounding for developing enhanced self knowledge, self esteem and efficacy, resilience, well being, effective relationships and a high quality of life.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop skills in self-awareness, acceptance and effective goal setting
  2. enhance skills in identifying and developing personal strengths; efficacy, positive thinking and self-talk, change; optimism and resiliency
  3. enhance skills in understanding and developing effective, mutually beneficial relationships
  4. develop skill in applying all concepts (above) to achieve enhanced individual, team, organisational and community success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jun Gu (First semester)
Ms Lara Tolentino (Second semester)

Prohibitions

MGX9940, GSB9002 and MGX9002


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSuzhou Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dan Wang

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of multi-national corporation (MNC) activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for assessing country attractiveness and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for various modes of operations in an international setting
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and risks involved in international business strategy
  4. evaluate the impact different foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098 or 4411 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSuzhou First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mingqiong Zhang

Synopsis

The unit looks at the ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (e.g.: ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098 or 4411 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSuzhou First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mingqiong Zhang

Synopsis

The unit will provide students with key insights regarding how trade policy is formulated, negotiated and implemented; the economic, social and cultural implications of international trade rules; the pattern of relationships that exists between trade policy and prosperity; and the implications of the global financial crisis for international trade policy. The unit focuses on the GATT/WTO System and Bilateral and Regional Trade Agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the advantages and limitations of the multilateral trading system in terms of its decision making processes and its agreements (agriculture, services, intellectual property, etc.)
  2. explain the recent surge of bilateralism and regionalism and assess the implications of this surge for the multilateral trading system
  3. evaluate the opportunities and the limitations of formally linking human rights and environmental issues to the global trading system
  4. judge whether the current global trading system treats trade liberalisation as a means to an end (the end being sustainable and equitable development) or an end in itself
  5. evaluate the implications of the global financial crisis for the global trading system.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098 or 4411 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedSuzhou Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dan Wang

Synopsis

Management implications of major internationalisation theories; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098 or 4411 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9660, MGX5966, MGS5966, MGM5966


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mauricio Palmeira

Synopsis

The major project will be the capstone unit in the degree, drawing together concepts and applications from all other units.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and conduct supervised independent research in an appropriate area of interest to business
  2. critically evaluate the literature relevant to the selected area of interest
  3. apply skills and concepts gained through previous studies
  4. contribute to applied marketing knowledge.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Permission required


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jo McGregor

Synopsis

Evaluation of a marketing program is a critical ingredient of the marketing director's role. This unit examines various means of diagnosing, assessing, tracking and evaluating performance and modifying actions to improve marketing operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct a comprehensive marketing productivity analysis using marketing audit models
  2. determine the adequacy of the existing organisational information systems and marketing effectiveness measures
  3. complete a strategic marketing policy review and design information systems to improve control and modify analysis procedures
  4. present the audit approach (philosophy); key information issues, control and modification procedures to class
  5. develop and adopt marketing audit model to suit circumstances.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units MKX5461, MKX9160, MKX9550 OR MBA9006 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Assoc Professor Colin Jevons (with special guest presenter Professor Leslie de Chernatony)

Synopsis

This unit will cover customer-based brand equity; brand vision, positioning and values; components of a brand, services branding; planning brand marketing programmes; points of parity and points of difference; implementing and resourcing brand marketing programmes; measuring and evaluating brand equity, its sources and outcomes; building a consistent integrated brand strategy and brand extensions; branding of new products; international brand management; reinforcing, revitalising, and retiring brands; and overall strategic brand management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the brand and the various functions of brand management
  2. understand the various components of a brand and how they interact
  3. analyse branding techniques and apply them to a variety of different issues
  4. generalise and hypothesise from branding theory into branding practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MKX9160 or MKF5916 or be enrolled in course 4431.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Kevin Argus

Synopsis

The unit introduces the omnipresence of sport in Australian society, the interconnectedness of sport and business, particularly marketing, and those factors that differentiate sport marketing from mainstream marketing. The unit will draw on the rapidly expanding body of literature on sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will also be introduced to the most current marketing concepts and their relevance to sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will develop an appreciation of sport sponsorship as a co-marketing alliance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discriminate between the marketing of sport properties, and the marketing through sport properties in the form of sponsorship and the implications for strategy development
  2. critically assess the relevance of the contingency marketing planning framework for sport marketing
  3. develop a fan profile based on level of team identification as an indication of fan loyalty
  4. determine the role of sponsorship in marketing and in particular in marketing communication and branding strategy
  5. critically analyse effective methods for evaluating sponsorship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: MBA9006, MBA5906, MKX5461, MKF5461, MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX5955 or MKX9550.

Prohibitions

MKX5241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bill Pickett

Synopsis

Using the case study method this unit provides an analytical framework from which students can explore how marketing strategy is applied to a variety of organisations within the context of contemporary and emerging issues. Students will be taught how to analyse, evaluate and implement marketing strategy. As this is the capstone unit in the Master of Marketing degree course, a theoretical grounding in the earlier core marketing units is essential for students undertaking this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of marketing (and other business disciplines) into a practical problem-solving framework
  2. analyse information supplied from a case and identify the core marketing problem
  3. design, evaluate and recommend marketing strategies that solve the identified core marketing problem
  4. develop personal communication and discussion skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 48 credit points at graduate level.

Co-requisites

Students must have enrolled in 66 credit points and must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 2276, 3802, 3810 or 4431.

Prohibitions

MKF5270 and MKX5251


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Joanne McGregor

Synopsis

This unit prepares students to work in a new marketing environment where new products and services that tackle environmental degradation and social inequity are endowing firms with enduring competitive advantage. It examines the core principles of sustainability from both micro-marketing (consumer, firm) and macro-marketing (society, economy) perspectives and equips students with thinking tools to develop sustainable marketing strategies for private and public firms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand key concepts of environmental sustainability from the standpoint of businesses (e.g. triple bottom line)
  2. understand how the concepts of marketing and sustainability inter-relate (e.g. sustainable products, pricing for sustainability)
  3. demonstrate and apply key sustainable marketing concepts, and build skills to do so in the longer term in organisations (e.g. life cycle analysis)
  4. make connections of sustainable marketing with other disciplines and everyday life (e.g. biodegradable product packaging)
  5. reflect on one's personal learning, and crystallise personal sustainability attitudes and behaviours.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed six graduate units or 36 credit points including one of the following units: MKX5461, MKX9160, MKX9550, MBA9006 or MBA5906 or be enrolled in course 3783 before undertaking this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mauricio Palmeira

Synopsis

A research report in an advanced area of interest applying the knowledge, concepts, tools and techniques acquired in other units in the program to a business-oriented research project.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and conduct supervised independent research in an appropriate area of interest to academic marketers
  2. critically evaluate the literature relevant to the selected area of interest
  3. broaden and deepen understanding of research methods in marketing
  4. contribute to marketing knowledge.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Permission required


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This is the capstone unit of the Master of Marketing degree program. The overarching goal of the degree is to prepare competent and responsible entrants to the marketing profession. Accordingly, this integrative, end-of-program capstone unit will help in translating knowledge gleaned from all other degree units (i.e. the academic discipline of marketing) toward the professional discipline of marketing. This will be achieved in the form of "direct decision making scenarios" (case studies), "experiential learning episodes" (simulation), "competitive situations" (mid-term case completion), "learning from academic and industry leaders" (research day, marketing masterclass, marketing breakfasts), and "immersive learning events" (industry visits).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate competitive marketing decision situations and craft innovative and systematic solutions for which personal responsibility is taken
  2. exhibit a keen sense of personal learning from professionals (academic and practitioner), competitive and immersive situations and decision scenarios
  3. develop a perspective of socially responsible and culturally sensitive global marketing practitioners.

Assessment

Within semester assessment:100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 288 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2276 and must have passed 60 credit points.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Samir Gupta

Synopsis

This unit is designed for students operating in a business-to-business (as opposed to a business-to-consumer) marketing environment. The various approaches the business-to-business marketing are reviewed, including the business-to-business marketing mix, operating in networks, the use of relationships, managing multiple channels, and segmentation of business-to business customers. The focus of the course is on developing strategies for business-to-business markets. The unit features both lectures, and tutorials, where students are encouraged to examine the practical application of business-to-business marketing principles.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the concepts and theories of business-to-business marketing from a manager's perspective
  2. explain the knowledge of the evolution of business-to-business marketing thought
  3. analyse the basic techniques and tools of business-to-business marketing as applied to the current and likely future Australian and international business environment
  4. formulate, implement and present business-to-business marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: MBA9006, MBA5906, MKX5461, MKF5461, MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX5955 or MKX9550.

Prohibitions

MKX5371


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester B 2015 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Kimble Montagu

Synopsis

Topics include the nature, role and scope of sales management; the sales organisation; the selection, recruitment, training and development of sales people; the motivation, compensation and evaluation of sales people; the sales process; sales forecasting and estimating market potential; sales budgeting and profitability; planning sales territories; determining sales quotas and the optimum allocation of sales effort and resources.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate different selling situations and select appropriate selling approaches to implement
  2. demonstrate an ability to communicate in a persuasive and professional manner to a group or to an individual whether during a formal presentation or otherwise
  3. apply appropriate writing skills to produce quality business reports
  4. recall the key elements of sales management, personal and selling, specific to business relationships.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MBA9006, MKX9550, MKX9160 or MKX5461 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to the critical thinking and planning required in the initial stages of a thesis or research project. Development of a literature review, research model and research proposal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of how to formulate a theoretical framework for a marketing problem/opportunity
  2. provide an understanding and appreciation of qualitative and quantitative research techniques
  3. provide an understanding of how to conduct data analysis
  4. develop a comprehensive case study and a comprehensive research report
  5. develop a capability of communicating research findings.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MKF9120 or MKF5912 or be enrolled in course 4431.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dominic Thomas

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an in-depth exposure to contemporary issues in marketing and in particular to the relationship between observed marketing practice and extant marketing theory. Taught in seminar format, the unit requires significant interaction between students and presenters.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise and evaluate some of the contemporary issues facing organisations and particularly marketers and marketing in today's dynamic marketplace
  2. examine how traditional marketing theory, structures, concepts, techniques and practices may become emerging issues, transformed by new knowledge or impacted by alternative perspectives
  3. explain a number of contemporary issues and their impact in detail
  4. analyse existing literature to gain insight into selected current and future issues that will impact business and marketing in particular
  5. recommend and compose responses to existing or potential marketing issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MKX9160 or MKF5916 or be enrolled in course 4431.

Prohibitions

MKX5461


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Harmen Oppewal

Synopsis

Explores the role and contribution of the behavioural sciences of the field of buyer/consumer behaviour and marketing through critical reading of current consumer research literature and the application of theory to the analysis of consumer behaviour in relation to two competing products. Includes literature review, group project and presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe, identify and critically assess the role and contribution of the main paradigms in the behavioural sciences to the field of buyer/consumer behaviour and marketing decision making
  2. analyse and critically assess the nature of explanation from a range of perspectives and describe the debates over what constitutes a 'scientific' explanation
  3. analyse selected topics from the current consumer behaviour literature from different and multidisciplinary perspectives and critically compare and evaluate these perspectives
  4. critical evaluation of the usefulness of some of the core concepts in the consumer behaviour literature for marketing practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MKF9110 or MKF5911 and MKX9160 or MKF5916 or be enrolled in course 4431.

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Felix Mavondo

Synopsis

This unit adopts a very practical approach to introducing multivariate statistical techniques that are currently popular in the analysis of business and marketing survey data. The main topics covered are: a review of statistical tools, factor analysis, structural equation modelling, cluster analysis, discriminant analysis, correspondence analysis and multivariate analysis of variance. SPSS software will be used for problem solving. The emphasis will be on understanding, interpreting and reporting results of the analysis and on the proper use of techniques. Case studies and exercises will be drawn from diverse areas of the business world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce exploratory factor analysis and structural equation modelling
  2. show how multiple regression and multivariate analysis of covariance can be used to analyse survey data
  3. provide exposure to logistic regression in discrete-choice modelling studies
  4. demonstrate the role of cluster analysis and multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis in understanding multivariate data
  5. provide an opportunity to become competent in the use of a statistical package (SPSS).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

ETX2121, ETX2111 or MBA9007

Prohibitions


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Synopsis

This unit will examine marketing activities undertaken by organisations with a special emphasis on the healthcare industry. It provides an introduction of marketing concepts and techniques covering aspects like value exchange, development of corporate and marketing strategic plans, product and service development, the use of marketing decision making tools and fundamentals of consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the concepts and theories of marketing and apply them to health administration and healthcare
  2. apply key techniques and tools of marketing management to healthcare environment
  3. examine the scope and role of the marketing function and its relationship to organisational strategies and critically evaluate how functional marketing plans can be developed and implemented in the healthcare context
  4. assess the marketing challenges facing firms in a more competitive global market place.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Dr Samir Gupta

Synopsis

Traditional business disciplines are starting to appreciate the fundamental challenges presented by the application of technology to their knowledge base. In marketing the most visible agent of change has been the WWW and online transacting which has already revolutionised a number of sectors of the world economy. This unit takes marketing and traditional views of marketing and exposes then to critical analysis in the light of technological change. It explores how marketers can utilise different ways of understanding, creating, communicating and delivering customer value in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an appreciation of new electronic communication technologies and their potential as platforms for marketing applications
  2. develop an understanding of the challenges presented to marketers by the emergence of information products
  3. provide an insight into how traditional marketing structures and concepts, techniques and activities translate into the new market medium
  4. traverse the marketing/technology interface within organisations and focus technological opportunities upon the generation of realisable benefits and customer value.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed MKX9160, MKF5916, MBA5906 or MBA9006 to undertake this unit. Students enrolled in course 3802 have no prerequisites.

Prohibitions

MKX5561


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Torgeir Aleti

Synopsis

This unit will extend understanding of digital marketing, in particular the role of new media. The social media landscape will be investigated, in terms of the tools and technologies, as well as consumers and communities. Approaches to understanding customers and stakeholders through the use of social media will be explored, and various strategies to engage with these stakeholders will be developed. Particular emphasis will be placed on social media metrics, including exposure to analytical tools, and the evaluation and reporting of strategic outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the social media landscape
  2. identify how organisations can utilise social media to build an in-depth understanding of customers and stakeholders
  3. construct social media strategies to engage customers and stakeholders
  4. understand how social media metrics can be used to measure the effectiveness of those strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed one of the following: MKX9160, MKX9550, MKX5461, MBA9006 or an undergraduate major in Marketing before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Tracey Dagger

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that apply to service organisations and industries including service design and delivery, customer service, service quality measurement and internal marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an appreciation of the unique challenges inherent in marketing and managing services and developing and delivering quality services
  2. integrate the strategies, tools and approaches for addressing the unique challenges associated with the marketing of services
  3. apply a knowledge of service quality to an actual business context
  4. become a more successful and effective manager and consumer through the understanding of the design, delivery and communication of the service offer
  5. explain the inter-functional coordination necessary to deliver a quality service.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MBA5906 or MBA9006 or MKF5461 or MKX5461 or MKF5916 or MKX9160


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Peter Danaher

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to extend knowledge and understanding beyond that covered in introductory marketing communication theory, and to develop improved skills to apply this understanding to practical and challenging communication scenarios. In particular emphasis will be placed on critical analysis and insights gained from exposure to the literature and professional practice in marketing communication.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. investigate and evaluate contemporary thinking, theory advances and practices in marketing communication and its constituent parts, including advertising, digital communication and so on, and their integration
  2. construct media management strategies through the analysis of media consumption and engagement behaviours
  3. compare metrics that are used to measure marketing communication strategies and elements
  4. devise structures and processes to ensure the creation of effective and efficient marketing communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed MKX9261 or MKF5926, OR be enrolled in course 4431 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MKX5641


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Ves Bogdanovich

Synopsis

The relationship marketing model; 'internal marketing' and collaborative work practices; processes for closing the 'service quality gap' including problem solving and opportunity seeking on an on-going basis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the general principles of relationship marketing
  2. critically evaluate the techniques used in relationship marketing and to evaluate how these may be applied in organisations
  3. analyse the opportunities and challenges that are inherent in implementing relationship marketing
  4. discriminate between situations where relationship marketing might be appropriate and where it might not.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: MBA9006, MBA5906, MKX5461, MKF5461, MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX5955 or MKX9550.

Prohibitions

MKX5660


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Peter Danaher

Synopsis

The ability to evaluate and anticipate the marketing department's contribution within the organisation is of growing importance. Increasingly, organisation boards are requiring marketing to provide greater rigour and accountability. This unit explores the use of marketing models and metrics as a means of analysing performance and demonstrating the expected return on marketing investment, thereby enabling effective decision making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concept of the value chain that provides a framework for linking business issues, marketing activity and consumer response to financial performance
  2. develop skills to view marketing processes and relationships systematically and analytically
  3. apply marketing metrics and models that relate to specific business issues
  4. analyse and interpret the output of a range of marketing models in order to improve marketing decision making
  5. have the ability to create a framework for developing a marketing dashboard.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of MKX9160, MKF5916, MBA9006, MBA5906, MKF5461 or MKX5461 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MKX5741


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan

Synopsis

Contemporary marketing leaders have to engage with diverse and compelling social issues. This is regardless of the sector in which marketing leaders operate - private, public, or civil society. Hence, awareness of contemporary social issues and the role of marketing in addressing these is a critical part of the modern marketing toolkit. The approach will define the marketer's contribution as responsible and effective global leaders. In this unit you will explore various marketing concepts, frameworks and techniques ranging from social marketing to macromarketing and transformative consumer research, which can help develop such awareness and facilitate informed decision making. A high level of understanding of marketing concepts will be assumed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and assess the challenges the broader society presents to the marketplace
  2. critically evaluate complex, contradictory social phenomena from a marketing perspective
  3. demonstrate sensitive, innovative solutions utilising a modern marketing toolkit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2276 and must have passed 48 credit points.

Prohibitions

MKX5760


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Shanfei Feng

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide an integrated approach to understanding strategic supply chain and marketing channel management issues. Managing channels of distribution is a critical strategic activity that can ensure effective market coverage and competitive advantage. In today's global high-tech market environment, with vastly shifting customer needs and shifts in balances of power, it is vital to develop sound knowledge and skills in in the design and management of marketing distribution channels and networks. The unit will address issues in both business-to-business (B2B) and business-to-consumer (B2C) markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge of key supply chain and distribution channel management theories, tools and techniques from a marketing perspective
  2. critically analyse the holistic relationship between supply chain and distribution channel management
  3. apply current supply chain and distribution channel management theory to marketing and distribution channel management strategies
  4. work effectively in teams, leadership, inter-personal, communication, and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2276 and completed MKX9160 or MKF5916 OR must be enrolled in 4431 or 0105 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Terry Grant

Synopsis

The ability to bring a steady stream of innovations to the marketplace is the underpinning of business success. Doing so with a firm focus on customers and emphasis on building strong, memorable brands underlines a marketing perspective on innovation. Such market-oriented innovation has to be pervasive and consistent in an organisation. This unit focuses on how innovation and new product development adds continuous value to organisations for it to be competitive in the dynamic markets. It will discuss the nuances of innovation from a marketing perspective and will provide tools and frameworks to tackle market-based innovation challenges. Students will have the opportunity to gain practical, real world experience through a project. Finally, the unit will enhance your ability to communicate (written and verbal) ideas and solutions in business market environment.

Outcomes

The learning outcomes of this unit are to:

  1. explain the theoretical concepts and processes of innovation
  2. assess the impact of networks in the innovation process
  3. apply the concept of value co-creation for new products/services
  4. develop a marketing plan for a new product/service based on co-creation concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 24 credit points of study before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2276, 4431 or 0105 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Terry Grant (First Semester); Dr Mauricio Palmeira (Second Semester)

Synopsis

Essential concepts in psychology and sociology relevant to consumer and organisational behaviour; essential frameworks, models and concepts; fundamental processes of motivation, perception and learning in individual behaviour; nature and influence of individual predispositions, including personality characteristics, attitude formation and change; the social influences of culture, class reference groups and family; consumer decision processes; diffusions of innovations and fads; links to and organisation/aspects of industrial buying, organisational decision making processes and influences, links and relevance between individual and organisational buying behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the origins and nature of buyer behaviour and explain the role of marketing in satisfying buyer's needs and wants
  2. explain the importance to marketing of having a good understanding of buyer behaviour and its influence on marketing strategy
  3. discuss the basic theories and concepts relevant to buyer behaviour in both consumer and organisational contexts
  4. analyse how these theories and concepts can provide insight into and help explain buyer behaviour in contemporary environments
  5. analyse and research buyer behaviour in a range of contexts and from a variety of perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda (First Semester); Dr Mauricio Palmeira (Second Semester)

Co-requisites

MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX9550, MKX5955, MBA5906 or MBA9006

Prohibitions

MKF9110


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dominic Thomas (First semester); Dr Stanislav Stakhovych (Second semester)

Synopsis

Topics include the nature and conceptualisation of research problems; theory building; exploratory and qualitative research; literature and secondary data reviews; data collection methods; measurement concepts; sampling and fieldwork; sources of error, evaluation of statistical and practical significance; data analysis and presentation; report writing; examples of industry applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a working knowledge of key concepts and methods used in marketing research
  2. develop a capability in formulating a theoretical framework for a marketing problem/opportunity
  3. provide an understanding of how to formulate a research design
  4. provide experience at developing and presenting a research proposal.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas (First semester)
Dr Stanislav Stakhovych (Second semester)

Prohibitions

MKF9120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Margaret Matanda (First semester);Professor Hean Tat Keh (Second semester)

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by business and non-business organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at both an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role and influence of marketing in the context of the modern business
  2. explain the key concepts, models and theories upon which the practice of marketing is based
  3. apply key concepts, models and theories in the development of marketing plans and marketing planning
  4. assess the marketing challenges facing firms in a more competitive global market place.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda (First semester)
Professor Hean Tat Keh (Second semester)

Prohibitions

MKX9550, MKX5955, MKX9160


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Tracey Dagger (First semester); Dr Elizabeth Snuggs (Second semester)

Synopsis

The uses of advertising, sales promotion, direct marketing and publicity to build and sustain brands, based on knowledge of communication theory, and the institutional and business practices which influence the achievement of appropriate and specific promotional goals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use a managerial framework for the planning, integrating, control and effectiveness evaluation of the marketing communication process for any branded identity
  2. construct realistic communication objectives and demonstrate the strategic use of individual and integrated communication elements to achieve these objectives
  3. set a marketing communication budget and allocate resources to the communication elements within this budget
  4. provide relevant input towards creative and media strategy
  5. formulate management perspectives on marketing communication issues, present and discuss them.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Tracey Danaher (First semester)
Dr Elizabeth Snuggs (Second semester)

Co-requisites

MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX9550, MKX5955, MBA5906 or MBA9006

Prohibitions

MKX9261


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Mr Frank Chamberlin

Synopsis

This unit covers the history, current practice and potential of direct marketing. The primary aim of this unit is to explore direct marketing in all its guises and to demonstrate the integration of direct marketing in the total marketing communications mix. There is a strong focus on the customer, interactivity, the database, targeting, segmentation, media channels and creativity (and how to evaluate creativity). Essential for students who want to have a comprehensive grasp of marketing communications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the integration of direct marketing in the total communication mix in both consumer and business to business environments
  2. analyse lifetime value using targeting, segmentation and database methodologies
  3. apply the economics of direct marketing
  4. evaluate channel variables and the impact of creative.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKX9701


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Professor Steve Worthington

Synopsis

Characteristics of services, market research for financial services, service quality measurement and management, internal marketing, buyer behaviour and the financial services customer, pricing and promoting financial services, trust and word of mouth advocacy, relationship marketing, and the internationalisation of the Australian financial services sector and the consequences for marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enable discrimination amongst the general principles of financial services marketing
  2. provide an ability to evaluate the opportunities and challenges that are inherent in the marketing of banking and other financial services
  3. enable critical evaluation of the tools and techniques used in the marketing of services generally and to judge to what extent these can be used in the marketing of banking and financial services.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKF9790


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Karen Lurati

Synopsis

The management of retail organisations, the application of technology in retail organisations and the application of retail strategic and financial planning. Issues, problems and practices involved in managing a retail operation; the role of the retailing industry in distribution, its structure and its dynamics; retail merchandise planning, buying and control; retail store location, layout, presentation and management; current theories and techniques used in the formulation and implementation of retail business strategy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define retailing and its strategic development
  2. demonstrate an awareness of the issues, problems, opportunities and practices involved in managing a retail operation
  3. describe the principles of retail merchandising, retail formats, retail branding, retail technology, retail experience
  4. provide some insights into the management of human resources within a retail business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX9550, MKX5955, MBA5906 or MBA9006

Prohibitions

MKF9810


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedMalaysia Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Nicholas Grigoriou

Synopsis

This is a practical based business project unit for the students of the Master of International Business (MIB) program. The business project may originate from large corporations, non-profit and government agencies, small businesses, or entrepreneurs in the area of marketing, competitive strategy, corporate finance, human resource or new venture development. The students will select the area of project based on a disciplinary area that they are familiar with (marketing, management, finance, international business or international management) and work closely with an academic staff member and a company staff member. They will be guided through the processes of proposal preparation, data collection and analysis, project implementation, business planning and project reporting. The focus of the unit will be on practical application of the knowledge acquired in other units of the MIB program. Students work in teams of two to three people on a significant business project related to a real business problem.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical business context
  2. demonstrate an ability to analyse, synthesise and evaluate a business situation and to develop appropriate recommendations in the form of a project report
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2098 and have completed 24 credit points.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Nicholas Grigoriou

Synopsis

Marketing is a means by which organisations create value for their stakeholders within pre-determined objectives. Marketing is widely accepted as a means for delivering greater levels of customer satisfaction, profitability, and sustainability within both a tactical and strategic framework. This unit will prepare graduates for the development, implementation and control processes and procedures of strategic marketing management plans for products and services of an organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. facilitate understanding of the conceptual framework of marketing in value creation and its many applications in decision making under various environmental constraints and with an Asia Pacific focus
  2. evaluate market based information, using it to plan and develop marketing strategies
  3. understand the behaviour of consumers and their role in value creation
  4. understand how value is created using elements of the marketing mix strategies
  5. understand the role of brands in value creation
  6. apply strategic planning tools in developing a marketing mindset.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKX9550, MKX5955, MKS5955, MKZ5955


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2015 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Hb Klopper

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures with emphasis on international aspects of marketing and consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate market based information, using it to plan and develop marketing strategies
  2. understanding the behaviour of consumers and their role in value creation
  3. explain how value is created using elements of the marketing mix strategies
  4. discuss the role of brand strategies and customer relationship management in value creation
  5. discuss the application of strategic planning tools in developing a marketing mindset, using marketing metrics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKF5916, MKX5955, MKX9160, MKX9550, MKZ5955, MKM5955


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2015 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Junzhao Ma

Synopsis

A major research project applying the procedures and techniques learned in MKF4030. Students prepare and write a report in such a way to pave the way for a higher academic degree in marketing or management or a career in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a marketing or business issue in the research literature which has either not been adequately researched previously or which requires replication
  2. critically review relevant academic and business research which relates to this issue
  3. develop a model or conceptualisation of the proposed research and an appreciation of the relevance of such studies to the business community
  4. develop a set of hypotheses to be tested, propose research into these hypotheses, by means of a specific research proposal
  5. conduct, analyse and report findings of the research so that all main issues are identified, limitations of the research are identified and the research findings are linked back to earlier studies in the literature.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Terry Grant

Synopsis

This unit is designed for entrepreneurial aspirants. It will help build skills to develop business plans for new ventures. The unit will emphasise an entrepreneurial planning process. Topics covered include: the entrepreneurial process, opportunity screening, team building, the entrepreneurial mind, financing innovation and entrepreneurship, shaping an entrepreneurial strategy, and developing and presenting the entrepreneurial business plan.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the elements of innovation underlying new ventures and market offerings in competitive environments
  2. demonstrate skills in recognising and exploiting (evaluation and documentation) profitable and durable market opportunities
  3. explain and evaluate the 'value' component of funding innovation
  4. apply the principles of value creation in analysing market ventures along all relevant stages of evolution (i.e. startup, growth, maturity, exit).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Must be enrolled in course 2276 or 4431 or 0105, and must have completed at least 12 credit points of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yunus Ali (First Semester); Dr Yongfu He (Second Semester)

Synopsis

Non-domestic market opportunities and appropriate techniques to identify, develop, monitor and manage the international environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the role of economic development international trade and, environmental factors in global marketing
  2. identify, evaluate and select attractive global markets
  3. apply marketing concepts and models in analysing and formulating global marketing plans
  4. critically assess strategic approaches used in global marketing
  5. develop and evaluate cohesive marketing strategies for organisations involved in global marketing and formulate global marketing programs for a hypothetical or real product and organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yunus AliDr Yongfu He (Second Semester)

Prerequisites

MBA9006, MKX5461, MKX9160 or MKX9550.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Griffiths

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2015 (Day)
Caulfield Trimester 2 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen GriffithsDr Jasmine Rushdi (Trimester 2)

Synopsis

The program is designed to expose students to the thinking of some of the world's leading marketers. Students are expected to understand the critical factors associated with marketing in an international arena such as culture, marketing communication, branding, sponsorship, globalisation, research, e-marketing, customer services and retailing. In addition to the standard unit fees payable for this unit, students are required to pay for airfares, transfers and accommodation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine international marketing and the forces impacting marketing at an international level
  2. analyse basic theories and concepts relevant to international marketing and examine how these theories and concepts can provide insight into, and an understanding of marketing in an international context
  3. compare a number of senior marketing managers perspectives and marketing strategies
  4. critically analyse the impact of economic, geographic, demographic and social forces on international marketing.
  5. evaluate the importance of cross cultural issues on marketing and their impact on international marketing strategy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

30 points from graduate marketing units including MKX9160.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedMalaysia First semester 2015 (Day)
Malaysia Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide international business students with basic knowledge and understanding of electronic business. This includes mechanism, infrastructure and tools of electronic business, retailing in electronic business, electronic learning, collaborative commerce, business to business electronic procurement, mobile electronic business, social commerce, marketing and advertising in electronic business, electronic business security and fraud protection, electronic business payment systems, electronic business strategies and globalization, and electronic business regulatory, ethical and social environments. Students are to analyse electronic business needs of consumers and businesses across the globe, and use the knowledge acquired in this unit to develop innovative e-business models to improve international business effectiveness and/or increase efficiency. In particular, emphasis will be placed on critical analysis and insights gained from electronic business literature, case studies, project works to solve the strategic problems of leveraging electronic business in international environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals to be achieved in this unit are to:

  1. identify and describe the relevant electronic business technologies for international business including electronic business mechanisms, infrastructure, tools, payment systems and security and fraud protection systems
  2. identify, analyse and critically assess the suitability of various e-business models for international business including e-retailing, e-banking, e-marketing and advertisements, e-procurement, e-learning, collaborative commerce, mobile commerce, social commerce, etc
  3. describe and apply electronic business strategy development process and identify the strategic and developmental issues in international business environment
  4. formulate an electronic business strategy for an international business to improve effectiveness and increase efficiency
  5. identify and describe the relevant electronic business regulatory, ethical and social environments in international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKX9310


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2015 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2015 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Kimble Montagu

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures with emphasis on international aspects of marketing and consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the concepts and theories of marketing and apply them to an international context
  2. analyse, evaluate, and interpret complex and sometimes contradictory marketing phenomena in international context
  3. apply the basic techniques and tools of marketing management to local and international environments
  4. examine the scope and role of the marketing function and its relationship to organisational strategies and critically evaluate how functional marketing plans can be developed and implemented
  5. compare and contrast various marketing theories and practices and develop recommendations for strategic action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKX9160, MKF5916 and MKX9550


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedNot offered in 2015
Coordinator(s)Mr Sumesh Nair (First Semester);Ms Karen Lurati (Second Semester)

Synopsis

International retailing, including trends in overseas markets and the development of off-shore retail ventures from an Australian base. Key issues in the globalisation of the retail industry, including cultural differences, economic environments, and demographic variables.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a broad appreciation of the dynamic nature of the global retail industry
  2. develop an understanding of the operations, strategies and performance of leading

global retailers

  1. provide an awareness of the key issues and challenges driving the nature and direction of change in the global retail markets
  2. develop awareness and understanding of key projected growth markets for retailers
  3. provide insights into the similarities and differences between consumers in diverse

retail markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Nicholas Grigoriou (First semester)
Dr Srinivas Sridharan (Second semester)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Marketing
OfferedSuzhou First semester 2015 (Day)
Suzhou Second semester 2015 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Felix Mavondo

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures with emphasis on international aspects of marketing and consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the concepts and theories of marketing and apply them to an international context
  2. analyse, evaluate, and interpret complex and sometimes contradictory marketing phenomena in an international context
  3. apply the basic techniques and tools of marketing management to local and international environments
  4. examine the scope and role of the marketing function and its relationship to organisational strategies and critically evaluate how functional marketing plans can be developed and implemented
  5. compare and contrast various marketing theories and practices and develop recommendations for strategic action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MKX9160, MKF5916, MKX9550, MKX5955, MKS5955, MKM5955


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed four units from the following: MPA5005, MPA5006, MPA9001, MPA9002, MPA9003, MPA9004, MPA9005, MPA9006.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in Master of Public Administration (Executive) to undertake this unit.


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in Master of Public Administration (Executive) to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MPA9001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2015 (Off-campus Day)

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in Master of Public Administration (Executive) to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MPA9002


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Organisational UnitDepartment of Management
OfferedNot offered in 2015

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in Master of Public Administration (Executive) to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MPA9004